City of Houston Idm

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 272

City of Houston

Department of Public Works and Engineering

INFRASTRUCTURE
DESIGN MANUAL

JULY 2009

TABLE OF CONTENTS

No. of
Chapter Pages

1 General Requirements......................................................................................................................8
2 Survey Requirements .......................................................................................................................8
3 Graphic Requirements ..................................................................................................................13
4 Platting Requirements......................................................................................................................6
5 Easement Requirements...................................................................................................................6
6 Utility Locations ..............................................................................................................................6
7 Water Line Design Requirements .................................................................................................20
8 Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements...................................................................15
9 Storm Water Design Requirements ...............................................................................................25
10 Street Paving Design Requirements...............................................................................................43
11 Geotechnical Requirements .............................................................................................................6
12 Street Cut Requirements ..................................................................................................................3
13 Storm Water Quality Design Requirements ..................................................................................18
14 Facility Design Requirements..........................................................................................................1
15 Traffic and Signal Design Requirements………………………………………………………...64
16 Miscellaneous……………………………………………………………………………………..7

TOC-1
07-01-2009
City of Houston
Department of Public Works and Engineering

INFRASTRUCTURE
DESIGN MANUAL

JULY 2009

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page

2.1 Perimeter of Standard Topographical Survey.............................................................................. 2-8


3.1 Existing Improvements ..........................................................................................................3-5/3-9
3.2 Proposed Improvements.....................................................................................................3-10/3-12
3.3 Line Code Definitions................................................................................................................ 3-13
4.1 Class III Preliminary Plats ........................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 Class III Final Plat (or Class II Plat)............................................................................................ 4-6
6.1 Typical Utility Locations in 10-foot-wide Residential Easement................................................ 6-5
6.2 Typical Utility Locations in 14-foot-wide Residential Easement................................................ 6-6
9.1 City of Houston IDF Curves ...................................................................................................... 9-23
9.2 City of Houston Storm Sewer Calculation Form ...................................................................... 9-24
9.3 City of Houston Roadside Ditch Worksheet.............................................................................. 9-25
13.1 Typical Bioretention Basin ...................................................................................................... 13-14
13.1 Typical Rain Barrel.................................................................................................................. 13-15
13.1 Porous Concrete Typical Section............................................................................................. 13-16
13.2 Dry Swale Cross Section ......................................................................................................... 13-17
13.3 Wet Swale Plan ........................................................................................................................ 13-18

TOC-2
07-01-2009
City of Houston
Department of Public Works and Engineering

INFRASTRUCTURE
DESIGN MANUAL

JULY 2009

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

7.1 Water Line Location within a Street Right-of-Way .................................................................. 7-3


7.2 Depth of Cover for Water Lines ................................................................................................ 7-5
7.3 Length of Restrained Pipe at Dead Ends ................................................................................. 7-12
7.4 Protection Requirements at Water Line - Sanitary Sewer Crossings ...................................... 7-16
7.4 Protection Requirements at Water Line - Force Main Crossings ............................................ 7-17
8.1 Minimum Grades for Wastewater Lines.................................................................................... 8-9
8.2 Maximum Distance Between Sanitary Sewer Manholes......................................................... 8-10
9.1 Standard Storm Sewer Inlets.................................................................................................... 9-10
15.4.01 Traffic Impact Categories………………..………………………………………………….15-10
15.4.02 Boundaries and Horizon Guidelines………………………………………………………...15-12
15.8.01 Driveway Design Criteria…………………………………………………………………...15-27
15.8.02 Driveway Spacing Criteria………………………………………………………………….15-28
15.8.03 Non-Residential-Driveway Placement Criteria(1)………………………………………….15-29

TOC-3
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

Chapter 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Research and submittal requirements for projects inside the city limits of Houston or within
Houston’s extraterritorial jurisdiction (ETJ).

1.02 REFERENCES

The following references should be reviewed in conjunction with this manual:

A. Latest revision of the following City of Houston Code of Ordinances:

1. Article IV Chapter 33, City Surveys

2. Chapter 40, Excavation in the Public Way

3. Chapter 42, Developments and Platting Requirements

4. Article V, Chapter 47, Storm Water Quality

B. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) of the Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas
Civil Statutes.

C. City of Houston Standard Specifications and Standard Details, latest revision.

D. Rules and Regulations published by Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ).

1. TCEQ, Water Utilities Division, Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems,
latest revision.

2. TCEQ, Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems, Texas Administrative Code, latest
revision.

E. State of Texas Engineering Practice Act.

F. State of Texas Professional Land Surveying Practices Act.

G. Storm Water Management Handbook for Construction Activities, Latest Edition as Prepared
by Harris County, Harris County Flood Control District (HCFCD), and City of Houston.

H. Harris County Public Infrastructure Department’s Rules and Regulations.

1-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. City Engineer - The authorized representative of the City, or his designee, having approval
authority for privately-funded projects, or having authority for administration of design and
construction contracts for the City.

B. Review Authorities - The authorized representatives of City departments, divisions, or


sections responsible for reviewing and approving calculations and drawings for privately-
funded projects and for design and construction contracts with the City.

C. Drawings - Plan, profile, detail, and other graphic sheets to be used in a construction contract
which define character and scope of the project.

D. Design Analysis - Narratives and calculations necessary to support design of a project.

E. Professional Engineer - An engineer currently licensed and in good standing with the Texas
Board of Professional Engineers.

F. Professional Land Surveyor - A surveyor currently registered and in good standing with State
of Texas Board of Professional Land Surveying.

G. Specifications - City of Houston Standard Specifications plus project-specific narrative


descriptions of procedures, requirements, and materials for a particular project.

1.04 PLAT AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWING REVIEW PROCESS

A. Review of plat and construction drawings by the Department of Public Works and
Engineering is a required part of the overall platting process under purview of the City
Planning Commission and the Planning and Development Department of the City of
Houston.

B. The process to be followed in submitting documents for review and approval of water,
wastewater, storm drainage, and street paving is described by the flowchart depicted in
Figure 4.1, Review and Approval Process for Plats and Drawings.

C. Utility and paving construction in projects requiring subdivision plats is not permitted until
the final plat has been released. Plat release by Department of Public Works and Engineering
is authorized by signature of the Director, or his designee, on final design drawings.

D. Construction of utilities and paving in projects not requiring a subdivision plat is not
permitted until final design drawings are approved and signed by the Director, Department of
Public Works and Engineering, or his designee.

E. Signature of the Director, Department of Public Works and Engineering, or his designee, on
final design drawings for utilities which are intended to remain private, does not infer

1-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

acceptance of the City for ownership or maintenance or operation of facilities indicated on


the drawings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures

1. To obtain review of final design drawings for both publicly-funded and privately-
funded projects, first submit drawings to the Public Works and Engineering Plan
Review Center for assignment of a log number before review will commence. The log
number will remain in effect for one year.

2. Once a log number is assigned, reference the number in all correspondence relating to
that project.

3. Obtain and complete plan review application forms for each review phase when the
project is logged in. The same log number will be used for all review phases of each
project unless review of a subsequent phase is delayed by over one year.

4. Plan Review Center personnel will process reviews through appropriate review teams
in the Department of Public Works and Engineering.

5. If a project has begun the review process but becomes inactive for a period of 12
months from the date of the last correspondence, the project will be considered
stopped, and the log number inactivated. Upon submittal of a project document for
review following the 12-month inactivity period, a new log number will be assigned
and the review process re-initiated.

6. The City has a weekly one-day walk-through procedure for the signature stage of
small projects. Instruction sheets for this procedure may be obtained in the Plan
Review Center.

7. Projects involving construction of privately owned facilities require review and


approval of any connection to a public water line, sanitary sewer, or storm sewer or to
a public street, using the process defined in this manual.

B. Preliminary Design

1. Privately-funded Projects: Submit one set of the preliminary overall design concept
with supporting evidence as described in Paragraph 1.07 and Paragraph 1.08.

2. Design Contracts with the City: Submit documents in accordance with requirements
of the professional engineering services contract.

1-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

C. Final Design.

1. Privately-funded Projects:

a. Submit one set of the final design drawings with prints containing preliminary
review comments.

b. For complex projects, it is recommended that a copy of the City review


comments on the preliminary drawings be returned with the revised final design
drawings.

2. Design Contracts with the City:

a. Submit documents in accordance with requirements of the professional


engineering services contract.

b. Submit a copy of the City review comments on the preliminary drawings.

D. Signature Stage.

1. Submit original tracings with prints containing previous review comments.

2. Specification submittals:

a. Submit final design specifications for review on all City funded projects.

b. Provide notes on plans for all privately funded projects stating that all facilities
shall be constructed in accordance with City of Houston Standards.

3. On City projects, submit final computer-generated drawing files in acceptable


electronic media including vicinity maps, right-of-way drawings, construction
drawings, or other information pertinent to the project. Submit surveyor’s field book
and electronic data in accordance with Chapter 2, Survey Requirements.

4. On privately funded projects, submit final computer generated drawing files in


acceptable electronic media including plat, right-of-way maps, and construction
drawings. Scanned images may be acceptable if project is less than 3 sheets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Have surveying and platting accomplished under direction of a Professional Land Surveyor.

B. Have recording documents sealed, signed, and dated by a Professional Land Surveyor.

1-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

C. Have calculations prepared by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer


trained and licensed in disciplines required by the project scope.

D. Have final design drawings sealed, signed, and dated by the Professional Engineer
responsible for development of the drawings.

1.07 RESEARCH REQUIREMENTS

A. Research existing utility and right-of-way information with the City departments listed
below. Present and discuss the concept of the project with these same departments.

1. Department of Aviation

2. Department of Public Works and Engineering

a. Engineering, Construction and Real Estate Division.

b. Engineering, Construction and Real Estate Division File Room Section

c. Maintenance and Right-of-Way Division, Traffic Management and


Maintenance Branch

d. Public Utilities Division, Utility Analysis Section

3. Planning and Development Department

4. Parks and Recreation Department

5. Finance and Administration Department, Franchise Administration

B. Research existing utilities and rights-of-way or easements for conflicts with the following
public and private organizations:

1. Texas Department of Transportation

2. Harris County Public Infrastructure Department

3. Harris County Toll Road Authority

4. Other County Governments

5. Franchise Holders:

a. Reliant Energy - Entex

1-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

b. Reliant Energy - HL & P

c. Southwestern Bell Telephone

6. Cable television and data communications companies

7. Other utility companies:

a. Utility districts

b. Private utilities/franchises

c. Railroad companies

d. Pipeline companies

C. Verify that no restrictions or conflicts exist that will prevent approval and permitting of the
project.

1.08 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Preliminary Design.

1. Privately-funded Projects:

a. Prior to preliminary design submittal, City reviewers are available to discuss


alternate solutions for project elements where alternate designs may be
considered.

b. Provide the City Engineer with drawings in sufficient detail to describe the
proposed improvements. Include proposed materials, if different from
materials approved by the City. Identify any problems or conflicts associated
with the project. Information furnished must be in sufficient detail for the City
Engineer to assess whether the design meets current City design standards.

c. Provide rights-of-way and easement requirements for the project.

2. Design Contracts with the City:

a. Participate in preliminary conferences with the City Engineer outlining the


scope of work and extent of the preliminary report.

b. Prepare preliminary engineering studies and designs based upon the scope of
work and as outlined in the professional engineering services contract with the
City.

1-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

c. Prepare the contractually specified number of copies of preliminary layouts,


sketches, reports, and calculations supporting the preliminary layouts. Prepare
alternate solutions, where applicable to the project, and include the engineer's
specific recommendations.

d. Prepare preliminary cost estimates for primary and alternate solutions of the
proposed construction.

e. Participate in conferences with the City to determine final design.

f. When required by the professional services contract, provide detailed soils


and geotechnical investigations and environmental investigations to support
proposed construction of utilities and paving.

g. Provide required real estate, rights-of-way, and easement requirements for the
project.

B. Final Design

1. Privately-funded Projects:

a. Revise design to reflect comments of the City Engineer and review


authorities. Include design calculations to support proposed improvements.

b. Provide review prints to the City Engineer and review authorities for
verification and compliance with prior review comments.

c. Obtain required signatures from governmental agencies (other than the City of
Houston) and private utility companies prior to requesting signature by the
City.

d. Include the following note on construction drawings - “Contractor shall notify


the City of Houston, Department of Public Works and Engineering (713-837-
7000) 48 hours before starting work on this project.”

2. Design Contracts with the City:

a. Furnish the City, where applicable, engineering data necessary for


applications for routine permits required by local, state, and federal
authorities.

b. Prepare detailed final design drawings and specifications in compliance with


comments received from the City subsequent to the review of the preliminary
design.

1-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering General Requirements

c. Prepare detailed cost estimates and proposal forms for the authorized project.

C. Original Tracings

1. Approved drawings for projects within the city limits will be assigned a City drawing
number and must be filed in the City file room prior to issuance of a permit for
construction. Tracings will become property of the City and will remain on file in the
file room for use by any person who may be interested in the project.

2. Approved drawings for projects outside of city limits and within the City ETJ will be
returned to applicant.

END OF CHAPTER

1-8
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 2
SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

Chapter 2

SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

2.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Suggested guidelines for use by engineers in development of construction drawings and right-
of-way maps inside the Houston city limits and outside the Houston city limits within the ETJ.
These guidelines are required for Capital Improvement Projects designed under professional
services contracts with the City of Houston.

2.02 REFERENCES

A. Article IV, Chapter 33, City Surveys, of the Code of Ordinances.

B. Professional Land Surveying Practices Act, latest revision.

2.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Survey Field Books - Bound standard engineer's field books for transit and level, 7-1/4 inch by
4-3/4 inch.

B. Data Collection Base - A database printout file reflecting station occupied, backsight, point
number, angle, distance, elevations, and identification code; or station and offset left and right
from a centerline or control line (transit, baseline, traverse, survey, etc.).

C. City Surveyor - An authorized representative of the City having approval authority for
privately-funded projects or having authority for administration of contracts for the City.

D. GPS - Navigational System operated by US Department of Defense. When used with proper
equipment, can provide survey quality locations in terrestrial space.

E. Site Control Monuments - Monuments needed to augment existing City monuments,


conforming to standards established by the City Surveyor.

2.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Adhere to these guidelines for Capital Improvement Projects designed under professional
services contracts with the City of Houston.

2.05 SUBMITTALS

A. For work performed through a professional service contract with the City, deliver field books
and an electronic file in standard ASCII format (Point Number, Northing, Easting, Elevation,

2-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

Description) at completion of the design phase. Photocopies or carbon copies of field books are
not acceptable. Field books and electronic files will be retained in the City's permanent files.

B. For right-of-way drawings identifying or describing acquisition of new or additional rights-of--


way, deliver field books and database printout files to the City Surveyor or a designee of the
City Surveyor. Additional documents to be submitted are:

1. Overall map of rights-of-way with individual drawings of parcels identified on overall


maps. Map or drawing media shall be mylar.

2. Computer printouts of coordinate computations.

3. Abstract information and copies of instruments used (i.e., deed) in preparation of the
right-of-way maps.

C. For projects requiring new Site Control Monuments, the surveyor responsible for setting the
monuments shall submit sealed City monument sheets, with necessary supporting data, to the
City Survey Office.

2.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Field surveying used in the development of construction drawings, calculations and preparation
of right-of-way maps, and field note descriptions shall be performed by or under the direct
supervision of a Professional Surveyor.

B. Surveys shall comply with the latest revision of the Professional Land Surveying Practice Act
of the State of Texas.

C. Field notes, descriptions and right-of-way maps shall have the imprinted or embossed seal of
the responsible Professional Surveyor and shall be dated and signed by the Professional
Surveyor.

D. When establishing horizontal control, surveyors shall transcribe onto the pages of a standard
Survey Field Book, as described in Paragraph 2.03.A, all angles and distances, at the time of
measurement, with an accompanying sketch. When establishing vertical control, the surveyor
shall use differential leveling, or GPS methods, and transcribe the vertical data onto the pages
of a standard Survey Field Book, with an accompanying sketch.

E. For projects where the horizontal control exceeds a distance of 2,000 feet from a found City of
Houston monument, a Site Control Monument shall be set. Additional Site Control Monuments
shall be set should the horizontal control exceed a radial distance of 2,000 feet from an existing
City monument or newly set Site Control Monument. Obtain City monument designation
numbers from the City Survey Office.

2-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

2.07 FIELD WORK

A. For engineering contracts with the City, field work shall be recorded in field books or on total
station database printouts. Obtain a field book number from the Survey Section or City
Engineer and record this identification in the title block on drawing sheets.

B. The control line must be monumented at its beginning, end, and at angle points with markers of
a permanent nature, such as iron rods, spikes, or other lasting identification. Make reference
drawings for each control monument showing ties to planimetric features to allow easy
recovery. Set markers at a maximum of 1000 feet on long lines.

C. Make ties of the found right-of-way monuments and property corners to the control line
according to the existing City of Houston survey system, as required by Article IV, Chapter 33,
City Surveys, of the Code of Ordinances.

D. Use City datum for elevations when available. Set temporary bench marks (TBM) within 200
feet of the beginning and end of the project and at intervals not to exceed 1000 feet throughout
the project.

E. Show centerlines and angles of intersections of side streets with the main roadway centerline
station.

F. Record topographic features within the public right-of-way, proposed right-of-way, any
contiguous easements to the right-of-way, and any construction right-of-way of the project and
on intersecting streets for a distance of 20 feet beyond the intersection of the right-of-way lines.
Identify all visible underground structures, such as inlets, manholes, and junction boxes, with
size, depth, and type.

G. Cross sections shall be taken at intervals of 100 feet for projects outside of the CBD. For
projects within the CBD, take cross sections at 25 or 50 foot intervals. For levels recorded in
field books, record rod readings or elevations as numerator and distance right or left of the base
or centerline as the denominator. Data collector of a total station can be used to acquire
necessary elevations at required intervals. Record elevation of driveways at intersection of
driveway centerline with existing or proposed right-of-way line. Cross sections shall include a
reading at the following points: street centerline, flow-line of ditch or gutter, curb or pavement
edge, sidewalk, the existing or proposed right-of-way line, 20 feet beyond the right of way line
if possible, and on intersecting streets for a distance of 100 feet beyond proposed pavement. See
Figure 2.1 Perimeter of Standard Cross Section Survey.

H. For acquisition of new or additional rights-of-way:

1. Tie points of commencing (POCs) or points of beginning (POBs) for each parcel to
the City survey monuments, if within 2,000 feet of the parcel. In the event any one
parcel in the right-of-way is within 2,000 feet of a City monument, tie all parcels to
the monument.

2-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

2. For projects more than 2,000 feet from a City survey monument, and where Site
Control Monuments are not established, job coordinates will be permitted with the
origin of coordinates shown and monumented on the map. The assumed coordinate
system must leave no question as having any relationship to true "x," "y" using the
Texas State Plane Coordinate System.

3. Set iron rods or permanent markers at the intersections of the proposed right-of-way
and property lines of parcels to be acquired.

4. Identify monuments, corners, angle points, points of curve (PCs), points of


intersection (PIs), points of tangency (PTs), and other points as either "found" or "set."
Describe each point such as 5/8-inch iron rod, 3/4-inch iron pipe, axle, concrete
marker, disk, or other item.

5. Locate improvements, buildings, fences, permanent signs, and other structures within
the parcel or within 10 feet of the proposed right-of-way that will influence the value
of the parcel to be acquired.

2.08 CALCULATIONS

A. Calculate coordinates of proposed right-of-way parcels, control points, found or set monuments,
curve data, lengths, stations and offsets to monuments, and proposed improvement features.
Calculate areas, cross sections, and volumes associated with construction drawings.

B. Computer printouts of the coordinate calculations should be submitted to the City with field
books and database printout files.

2.09 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

A. Found existing right-of-way monuments or property corners must be plainly shown on the
drawings and located by station and distance, right or left from the control line, or construction
centerline. Monuments used to establish the control line must be identified as Control Points,
and their relationship to the construction centerline and to the proposed or existing right-of-way
lines must be shown. If the project is dimensioned from a control line, such as construction or
design baseline, which is different than the control line referenced in Paragraph 2.07, it must be
established and monumented in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph 2.07.
Coordinates for transverse control points and all points of curve, points of tangency, and points
of intersection along the design baseline shall be shown.

B. Show location and identification of existing City survey monuments, right-of-way monuments,
and found property corners by station and distance, right or left of control line or centerline.
Show swing ties set for control or centerline control.

2-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

C. Show and identify location of the City datum monuments and temporary bench marks used for
elevation control with year of the City datum on each sheet of the drawings. List the TBM
located closest to that particular sheet in a station/offset, description and elevation format.

D. Show centerline angles of intersection of side streets with main roadway centerline. Where
bearings are used, identify source of bearings and show bearings on both control line and
project centerline when they are not the same line.

E. Identify locations of manholes, angle points, bends, etc., for proposed wastewater, storm
sewers, water lines, and pavement features such as radius returns and centerlines of boulevard
openings. Show relationship of proposed improvements to the right-of-way line.

F. For bridges, overpasses and underpasses show top of pavement elevations at gutter line and
centerline for the following locations:

1. Construction joints

2. Armor or expansion joints

3. Intervals between bents that correspond to the increments used for dead load deflection
calculations.

G. For bridges and grade separations, drawings must incorporate layout sheets which identify
proposed centerline and curve information plus:

1. Surface coordinates for control points so that an inverse between coordinates reflects a
surface distance. Identify origin of coordinate system used.

2. Show coordinates of centerline or control line at PIs.

3. Show coordinates of curb lines at their intersection with the centerline of bents and
abutments for irregular structures.

2.10 RIGHT-OF-WAY MAPS

A. Show true "x," "y" values (i.e., grid) on monuments based on the City survey control and the
scale factor used to determine the "x," "y" values. Distances shown shall be surface distances
and plainly marked as such. Show ties to the POC or POB of each right-of-way parcel from the
City survey monuments using the Texas Plain Coordinate System bearings and surface
distances.

B. Surveyors may use assumed coordinates on projects located more than 2,000 feet from existing
City of Houston monuments, when Site Control Monuments are not established. Show location
of monuments used as origin of job coordinates. The assumed coordinate values must leave no

2-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

question as to their relationship with the true "x," "y" using the Texas State Plain Coordinate
System.

C. Distances on proposed right-of-way lines shall be continuous from beginning to end of the job.
Show either straight line or arc distance across intersecting streets.

D. Where a parcel is taken from a larger tract, show dimensions, distances, and area of the
remainder of the tract based on recorded information.

E. Identify the evidence used to decide the final placement or establishment of the proposed right-
of-way line, such as angle points, or corner monuments, as either "set" or "found." The
description of each point used shall be shown on the drawing as identified in the field survey.

F. Coordinate values of "x," "y" shall be shown for PCs, PTs, and PIs of curves on the proposed
right-of-way lines. Curve data must include the following: delta, radius, arc length, chord
length, and chord bearing.

G. Coordinate values of "x," "y" must be given on the POB of at least one tract in each block.
Where the proposed right-of-way is to be acquired from a large tract of land, coordinate values
should be given for the POB of field note description of the large tract.

H. Other information to be shown on right-of-way maps:

1. Improvements such as buildings, fences, permanent signs, and other structures located
on the property or within 10 feet outside the right-of-way line that will influence the
value of the parcel to be acquired.

2. Abstract information used in preparation of the right-of-way map.

3. Field book numbers obtained from the City Surveyor.

4. Real estate numbers obtained from the City Surveyor, right-of-way engineer, or Real
Estate Division.

2.11 DOCUMENTS

A. Where new construction will damage, destroy, or alter existing survey markers, include in
specifications a requirement for installation of survey marker boxes by construction contractor
at a unit price per box. The City Surveyor will determine the number and location of boxes to
be furnished and installed by the contractor.

2-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

B. Maps and metes and bounds field notes shall have the Professional Surveyor's seal imprinted or
embossed on them and shall have the Professional Surveyor’s signature and date affixed to the
instrument.

END OF CHAPTER

2-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Survey Requirements

2-8
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 3

GRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

Chapter 3

GRAPHIC REQUIREMENTS

3.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Graphic requirements for engineering drawings.

3.02 REFERENCES

A. City of Houston monument ties in compliance with Article IV, Chapter 33, City Surveys, of
the Code of Ordinances.

3.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Computer Aided Drafting Design (CADD) - Preparation of drawings, plans, prints, and other
related documents through the use of computer equipment and software programs.

3.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide a cover sheet for projects involving three or more design drawings (excluding
standard City of Houston detail sheets). Drawing sheet numbers and titles shall be listed on
the cover sheet. Include an area key map and vicinity map to identify project location.

B. Drawings shall be prepared on 23" x 36" Federal Aid Sheets, 22" x 34" ANSI standard
drawing sheets, or nominal 24" x 36" drawing sheets, as appropriate.

C. Show service area on cover sheet or area map.

D. Final design drawings shall be India ink on mylar, or produced by CADD on mylar using
non-water based ink. Do not use adhesive-backed material on final drawings. Stick-ons may
be allowed with approval of the City Engineer for a minor correction during the final review
process.

E. Details of special structures (not covered by approved standard drawings, such as stream or
gully crossings, special manholes, or junction boxes) shall be drawn with vertical and
horizontal scales equal to each other.

F. Each set of engineering drawings shall contain paving and utility key drawings indexing
specific plan and profile sheets. City Standard Details, where applicable, shall be included.
All sheets shall have standard title blocks. Where applicable, show HCFCD key drawings
and numbers.

G. Draw key overall layouts to a minimum scale of 1" = 200'.

3-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

H. Plan stationing must run from left to right, except for short streets or lines originating from a
major intersection, where the full length can be shown on one sheet.

I. A north arrow is required on all sheets and should be oriented either toward the top or to the
right. This requirement is waived under the following conditions:

1. A storm water or sanitary sewer with flow from west to east or from south to north.

2. A primary outfall drainage ditch with flow from west to east or from south to north.

3. Stationing is intended to start from the cardinal points of the compass and proceed in
the direction of construction.

J. Standard scales permitted for plans and profiles of paving and utility construction drawings
are as follows:

1. Major thoroughfares, streets with esplanades over 400 feet in length, or special
intersections/situations.

1" = 20' Horizontal, 1" = 2' Vertical

2. Minor or residential single-family streets.

1" = 20' Horizontal, 1" = 2' Vertical


1" = 50' Horizontal, 1" = 5' Vertical, or
1" = 40' Horizontal, 1" = 4' Vertical

3. Scales of Paragraph 3.04J.2 above are minimum; larger scales may be used to show
details of construction.

4. Deviation from specified scales can only be permitted with the special approval of the
project manager or section head.

5. Single-banked plan-and-profile drawings are acceptable; double-banked plan-and--


profile sheets are allowed in certain situations such as off-site utility lines in
undeveloped areas.

K. Show ties on drawings to City monuments when applicable; otherwise, make a statement on
the cover sheet referencing assumed control coordinates.

L. Each sheet of the plan and profile shall have a benchmark elevation and description defined.

M. The seal, date, and original signature of the Professional Engineer responsible for the
drawings is required on each sheet developed by the design engineer. The design engineer

3-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

may use stamped seal or embossed imprint; however, the embossed imprint must be shaded
so that it will reproduce on prints.

N. A copy of the final plat for new development shall be included with the final design drawings
when submitted for final approval.

O. If a roadway exists where drawings are being prepared to improve or construct new
pavement or a utility, label the existing roadway width, surfacing type, and thickness.

P. Show all street and road alignments on drawings.

Q. Develop drawings to accurate scale showing proposed pavement, typical cross sections,
details, lines and grades, and existing topography within street right-of-way, and any
easement contiguous with the right-of-way. At the intersection, the cross street details shall
be shown at sufficient distance (20-foot minimum distance outside the primary roadway
right-of-way) in each direction along cross street for designing adequate street crossings.

R. Match lines between plan and profile sheets shall not be placed or shown within cross street
intersections including cross street right-of-way.

S. Show natural ground profiles as follows:

1. For privately-funded projects, centerline profiles are satisfactory except where a


difference of 0.50 feet or more exists from one right-of-way or easement line to the
other, in which case, dual profiles are required.

2. For City projects, provide natural ground profiles for each right-of-way line.
Easement profiles shall conform to Paragraph 3.04T.1.

T. Basic plan and profile sheets shall contain the following information:

1. Identify lot lines, property lines, easements, rights-of-way, and HCFCD outfalls.

2. Label each plan sheet as to street/easement widths, pavement widths, pavement


thickness where applicable, type of roadway materials, curbs, intersection radii, curve
data, stationing, existing utilities (type and location), and any other pertinent feature
affecting design.

3. Show utility lines 4 inches in diameter or larger within the right-of-way or


construction easement in profile view. Show utility lines, regardless of size, in the
plan view, including communication and fiber optic cables.

4. Graphically show flow line elevations and direction of flow for existing ditches.

3-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

5. Label proposed top of curb grades except at railroad crossings. Centerline grades are
acceptable only for paving without curb and gutters.

6. Show in profile curb return elevations for turnouts.

7. Gutter elevations are required for vertical curves, where a railroad track is crossed.

8. For street reconstruction projects, show in profile the centerline elevation at the
property line of existing driveways.

9. Show both existing and proposed station esplanade noses or the centerline of
esplanade openings, including esplanade width.

10. The design of both roadways is required on paving sections with an esplanade.

11. Show in plan view station PCs, PTs, and radius returns. Show in profile station radius
returns and grade change PIs with their respective elevations.

U. For plant work, use a grid system to locate proposed work.

3.05 GRAPHIC STANDARDS

A. The following graphic standards for plan and profile shall apply to drawings of 1" = 20'
scale. For smaller scale drawings, use proportionally smaller line sizes.

B. Existing Improvements: The standards shown in Figure 3.1, Existing Improvements, are
required for depicting existing improvements on base drawings. Use lower case letters with a
No. 0 reprographic pen or equal line weight unless otherwise shown in the pen/line weight
table, Figure 3.3, Line Code Definitions. Smaller pen sizes for lettering may be used for
clarity.

C. Proposed Improvements: The standards shown in Figure 3.2, Proposed Improvements, are
required for depicting proposed improvements on base drawings. Use upper case letters with
a No. 3 reprographic pen or equal line weight unless shown otherwise in the pen/line weight
table, Figure 3.3, Line Code Definitions. Smaller pen sizes for lettering may be used for
clarity.

D. Signature Block: Use latest edition of Signature Blocks issued by the Engineering,
Construction and Real Estate Division for private and City projects.

END OF CHAPTER

3-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-8
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-9
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-10
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-11
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-12
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-13
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Graphic Requirements

3-14
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 4

PLATTING REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Platting Requirements

Chapter 4

PLATTING REQUIREMENTS

4.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Coordination of platting requirements with the preparation of project drawings and


specifications and their review and approval processing.

4.02 GENERAL PLATTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Figures 4.1 and 4.2 for flow charts of the process by which plats and related
documents are submitted, reviewed, and approved by the Department of Public Works and
Engineering. There are three classes of subdivision plat: a class I plat, a class II plat and a
class III plat. Class I plats and class II plats are optional and may be used in lieu of a class III
plat if the subdivision plat meets the qualifications of Sec. 42-23 b and c of the platting
ordinance. Class I and class II plats do not propose the creation of any new streets; nor
propose the dedication of any easements for public water, wastewater collection or storm
sewer lines. A class I plat goes through a ten day administrative review process within the
Planning and Development Department. During that review questions may arise regarding
the delivery of utilities that may be directed to Public Works and Engineering staff.

B. Platting requirements are found in Chapter 42 of the Code of Ordinances.

C. All class II and class III plats submitted to the Planning and Development Department will be
routed to the Department of Public Works and Engineering for review.

D. Design drawings (when required) shall be submitted to the Department of Public Works and
Engineering with the name of the proposed plat clearly identified on the cover sheet.

E. The Planning and Development Department may record plats after the Department of Public
Works and Engineering approves design drawings.

4.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Class III Preliminary Plat

1. The level of investigation to be performed for a class III preliminary plat is to identify
major development impediments to water, wastewater collection and treatment, or
storm drainage that are primarily the result of constraints external to the plat itself.
Such constraints include, but are not limited to:

a. Water Lines:
(1) Long dead-end water lines.

4-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Platting Requirements

(2) Single feed water lines.


(3) Inadequate capacity or pressure to the site.
(4) Future plans for construction of major City facilities that will
impact the site.

b. Wastewater Collection System:


(1) Inadequate right-of-way or wastewater easements.
(2) Limited wastewater service capacity for the area.
(3) Future plans for construction of major City facilities that will
impact the site.

c. Storm Drainage System:


(1) Drainage outfall severely under capacity.
(2) Encroachment into flood-prone areas or floodway.
(3) Storm water detention or diversions of watershed drainage that
impact the property.
(4) Future plans for construction of major City facilities that will
impact the site.

2. Department of Public Works and Engineering will review class III preliminary plats
and take one or more of the following actions:

a. Pose no objection to the plat.

b. Request a meeting with the applicant to discuss design and construction


requirements.

c. Request specific additional information, easements, or improvements to


the plat or the land within the purview of the department.

d. Request one-line drawings be submitted prior to detailed engineering


drawings and final plat submittal.

3. Approval of a preliminary plat by Department of Public Works and Engineering does


not infer approval of proposed infrastructure. Review of infrastructure will take place
upon submittal of one-line drawings, if required, which may occur after preliminary
plat approval and must occur prior to final plat approval.

B. Class II and Class III Final Plat

1. The Department of Public Works and Engineering will review class II and class III
final plats and final design drawings, easement documents, and other data. Review
will be for the following items, as a minimum:

a. Compliance with standards contained in this Design Manual.

4-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Platting Requirements

b. Adequacy of service availability for:


(1) Water
(2) Wastewater
(3) Storm sewer or storm water detention.

c. Other design standards of the Department of Public Works and


Engineering.

C. Comments resulting from reviews described in Paragraphs 4.03A and 4.03B will be reported
to the Planning and Development Department for inclusion in CPC Form 101.

4.04 DESIGN ANALYSIS

A. For plats of land located inside the city limits, review of final design drawings and other
documents required by the Department of Public Works and Engineering for final plat
approval will address the following:

1. Resolution of conflicts with existing and proposed utilities.

2. Layout of water lines for maximum circulation of water. The pattern shall allow at
least two sources of water to be constructed within the public right-of-way or
permanent easement. Side lot easements shall meet the requirements of Chapter 5,
Easement Requirements, and Chapter 7, Water Line Design Requirements.

3. Adequate capacity in water and wastewater facilities to be utilized. The City may
require a current letter of utility commitment prior to approval of a plat.

4. Adequacy of drainage facilities.

5. Sizing and identification/designation of easements within the plat and required


easements outside the plat boundary.

6. Recordation of required off-site easements or lift station sites, their depiction on the
plat, and submittal to the City of record documents.

B. For plats of land located outside the city limits, review of final design drawings and other
documents required by the Department of Public Works and Engineering for final plat
approval will address all items in Paragraph 4.04A plus the following:

1. When appropriate, a letter from the municipal utility district's president or board or
from the property owner stating that all off-site easements that are not immediately
obtainable (for example: those crossing fee strips, rail roads, or other areas under
eminent domain) are in progress and that it is the intention of the municipal utility
district or property owner to complete the acquisition of such easements. The letter

4-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Platting Requirements

will be accompanied by a certified survey plat and legal description of such


easements.

2. That separately platted tracts requiring service are or will be directly served by public
utilities located in or abutting public rights-of-ways or permanent access easements
with overlapping public utility easements.

3. That necessary contracts and documents for inside the city limit and outside the city
limit are approved and signed.

4. For a plat that includes portions both inside and outside the city limits and where
there will be an imminent need for utility services, a current letter of utility
commitment may be required prior to approval.

END OF CHAPTER

4-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Platting Requirements

4-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Platting Requirements

4-6
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 5

EASEMENT REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Easement Requirements

Chapter 5

EASEMENT REQUIREMENTS

5.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Requirements for allocating and recording easements for water, wastewater, and storm
drainage facilities located outside of public rights-of-way.

5.02 REFERENCES

A. Utility Coordination Committee (UCC) for the Metropolitan Area - Typical utility location in
10-foot- and 14-foot-wide easements, back-to-back lots, and perimeter lots.

5.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Easements - Areas set aside for installation and maintenance of utilities by public and private
utility operators.

5.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Where public utilities are located in, along, across or adjacent to private drives, private
streets or permanent access easements in platted single family residential lot subdivisions;
such drives, streets or easements shall have an overlapping public utility easement to provide
access and maintenance rights. Public utility easement rights shall be superior to permanent
access easement rights allowing the City ingress and egress for maintenance of utilities.

B. Easements for electrical and gas lines must comply with requirements of the UCC and are
not covered under this Design Manual.

C. Easements are to be defined and submitted as part of the recordable plat either shown on the
plat or by metes and bounds description. The process for recording the plat is described in
Chapter 4, Platting Requirements.

5.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Recordable plats and metes-and-bounds descriptions of easements must be prepared under


the direction of a Professional Surveyor. The surveyor must seal, sign, and date documents
prepared under his supervision.

5.06 PLAT AND EASEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Requirements for Platted Easements.

5-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Easement Requirements

1. For construction inside city limits, submit a copy of the final plat accompanied by a
CPC Form 101 together with the original engineering drawings for approval and
signatures.

2. For construction outside city limits but within Houston's ETJ.

a. Where no easements are required outside the plat boundary, follow the same
requirements as for plats inside city limits given in Paragraph 5.06A.1.

b. Where easements are to be dedicated outside the plat boundary or through


property under different ownership, follow the instructions in Paragraph
5.06A.1 for plats inside city limits and the additional requirements following:

(1) Submit a copy of the recorded instrument creating the easement or a


metes-and-bounds description and a map of the easement, along with a
letter from the Municipal Utility District Board or property owner
stating the intent to obtain or dedicate necessary easements. The
instrument shall be recorded prior to or simultaneously with the plat.
(2) All off-site easements necessary to serve a proposed development
must be shown on the face of the plat, or an acceptable tie between the
plat and easements must be established between the two documents.
Off-site easements must be recorded prior to or simultaneously with
recordation of the plat.

B. Requirements for Easements Deeded to the Public or to the City. Easements required for
construction of a proposed project must be approved and accepted prior to approval of final
design drawings or issuance of a permit for the proposed construction.

C. Additional Requirements for Easements Deeded to the City:

1. Easements shall be either a part of the dedication on the plat of a subdivision, deeded
to the City on standard forms provided by the City for that purpose, or on forms
approved by the City Attorney.

2. The person seeking to deed an easement to the City shall furnish the City with a
reproducible map showing the easement and its location.

3. A construction permit will be granted upon acceptance by the City of recordable


instruments dedicating the easements.

5.07 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Easements for Water Lines and Appurtenances.

1. Water Lines:

5-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Easement Requirements

a. When outside a public street right-of-way or permanent access easement with


overlapping public utility easements, easements must be dedicated and
restricted for water lines only.

b. When possible, easements should be contiguous with public rights-of-way.

c. Provide paved access for water line easements located along back lot property
lines.

d. For water lines located outside of the street right-of-way:


(1) The minimum width of easement for lines 12 inches in diameter and
smaller shall be 10 feet, and for lines 16 inches in diameter and larger
shall be 20 feet.
(2) The easement shall be contiguous to the street right-of-way, or
contiguous to a public utility easement that is contiguous to the street
right-of-way.

e. For water mains located less than 5 feet from right-of-way lines, the outside
edge of a water line easement shall be located from the right-of-way line as
follows:
(1) 12-inch diameter and smaller - 5 feet
(2) 16-inch diameter and larger - 10 feet

f. Water lines along State rights-of-way shall be installed outside of the right-of-
way in a separate contiguous easement. Width of easements shall be as
provided in Paragraph 5.07.A.1.d.

g. No backlot easements will be allowed for the installation of water lines.

h. Commercial developments inside the City and in the ETJ requiring on-site fire
hydrants must provide a minimum 20-foot water line easement for the water
lines and fire hydrants.

i. The centerline of any water line shall be no closer to a building line, building
foundation or building slab than 10 feet for water lines 12 inches in diameter
and smaller and no closer than 15 feet for water lines 16 inches in diameter
and larger.

j. In new developments, water lines shall be centered in water line easements.

k. When using side lot easements, such easements shall be a minimum of 20 feet
in width, located on one lot or centered between two lots. If centered between
two lots, the water line may be centered within the 10 feet of one lot, or
centered in the easement.

5-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Easement Requirements

2. Fire Hydrants:

a. Use a minimum 10-foot by 10-foot easement for fire hydrants located outside
of public rights-of-way.

b. Do not locate fire hydrants in 10-foot-wide water line or water meter


easements.

3. Meters and Valves:

a. Two-inch and smaller meters and shut-off valves (stop boxes) shall be set
within public rights-of-way if possible. Otherwise, they shall be set in 5-foot
by 5-foot water meter easements.

b. The minimum size of water meter easements for three-inch through six-inch
meters shall be 10-feet by 20-feet and for six-inch and larger meters shall be
15-feet by 25-feet.

c. Water meter easements shall be located contiguous with public rights-of-way


unless approved by the City. Access easements a minimum of 15 feet wide
will be required when not contiguous with a public right-of-way.

B. Easements for Wastewater Lines and Appurtenances.

1. Wastewater Collection Lines:

a. Easements adjacent to public rights-of-way, easements, or fee strips, including


those owned by HCFCD, Houston Lighting & Power Company, and pipeline
companies.
(1) Easements for sanitary sewers 10 inches or less in diameter shall have
a minimum width of 15 feet or a minimum width equal to the depth of
the proposed sewer, whichever is greater.
(2) Easements for sanitary sewers 12 inches or greater in diameter shall
have minimum width of 20 feet or a minimum width equal to the depth
of the proposed sewer, whichever is greater.

b. Sanitary sewer easements or other combined easements for sanitary sewers


which meet the conditions below shall have a minimum width equal to twice
the sewer's diameter plus the flow line depth of the sewer from natural
ground, proposed fill elevation, or 100-year Floodplain Fill Elevation,
whichever is greater; but not less than 25 feet. The qualifying conditions are:
(1) Runs through commercial reserves or across open country (acreage);
(2) Serves other existing or proposed platted commercial reserves or non-
platted acreage tracts; and

5-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Easement Requirements

(3) Is not immediately adjacent to public rights-of-way, easements, or fee


strips, including those owned by HCFCD, Houston Lighting & Power
Company, and pipeline companies.

c. Sanitary sewers which cannot be located in the center of easements shall be


located a minimum distance of half the depth from the nearest side of the
easement.

d. Sanitary sewers or force mains, installed in easements separated from public


or semi-public rights-of-way by other private or utility company easements,
shall be extended along or across the private utility company easement to
provide access for maintenance of the sewer or force main.

e. Easements described in Paragraphs 5.07B.1.a through 5.07B.1.e shall be


open-ended easements in conformance with City Codes, Ordinances and
Planning Requirements. Such open-ended sanitary sewer easements shall be
extended if necessary and shall be fully connected at both ends to public
facilities including existing or proposed:
(1) Public road rights-of-way
(2) Wastewater treatment plant sites
(3) Wastewater pump station sites
(4) Public utility easement of adequate size for maintenance access.

2. Force Mains:

a. Force mains of all sizes shall have a minimum easement width of 20 feet for
single lines which are not located adjacent to public or semi-public rights-of-
way.

b. Force mains located in easements adjacent to public or semi-public rights-of-


way shall have a minimum easement width of 10 feet subject to location and
depth of the force main.

3. Service Leads: The minimum easement for building service leads is 6 feet.

C. Storm Drainage Lines and Appurtenances

1. Storm Sewer Lines:

a. To the extent practical, storm sewers shall be placed in public road rights-of-
way or permanent access easements with overlapping public utility easements
in accordance with Chapter 6, Utility Locations.

5-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Easement Requirements

b. Storm sewers shall have a minimum 20-foot-wide easement. In the event of


extreme depth or large sewers, additional width may be required to allow for
proper maintenance operations.
(1) Maintenance operations require an easement width equal to the storm
sewer width plus the depth rounded up to the nearest multiple of 5-feet.

c. Storm Sewers shall be centered within the limits of the easement.

2. Storm Water Detention Basins:

a. Easements for storm water detention basins shall be dedicated by plat or by


separate instrument filed in conjunction with plat approval. Such easements
shall be dedicated to the developer, owner, or water district.

b. Such easements shall have a minimum 20-foot width surrounding the


perimeter of the detention basin as measured from top of bank unless adjacent
to a street right-of-way.

D. Combined Storm and Sanitary Sewer Easements

1. Combined storm and sanitary sewer easement widths shall be as specified in


5.07C.1.b for storm sewer lines. The centerlines of sanitary sewer mains, trunks, or
force mains shall be located in at least half the width of the easements defined in
Paragraph 5.07B.1, but not less than 10 feet from the edge of the easement.

2. The centerline of sanitary sewers on the outside of combined storm and sanitary
sewer easements adjacent to public or semi-public rights-of-way, shall be located in
at least half the width of the easement defined in Paragraph 5.07B.1.d, but not less
than 10 feet from the outside edge of the easement.

END OF CHAPTER

5-6
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 7

WATER LINE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

Chapter 7

WATER LINE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

7.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Criteria for the design of water lines.

7.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

B. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

C. Refer to the list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements.

7.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Obtain approval from the Office of the City Engineer (OCE) Division for exceptions or
deviations from these requirements. Exceptions or deviations may be granted on a project-
by-project basis.

B. Lines.

1. Locate water lines within street rights-of-way, permanent access easements with
overlapping public utility easements, easements adjacent to street rights-of-way, or
recorded water line easements:

a. Pipe with 2-inch diameter is allowed only in rehabilitation projects where tie-
ins to existing 2-inch lines are necessary.

b. Pipe with 4-inch diameter may be used on dead-end lines within cul-de-sacs
supplying a maximum of 16 lots.

c. Pipe with 6-inch diameter may be used if the line is less than 1000 feet in
length and interconnected between 2 lines which are 8-inch diameter or larger.
Only one fire hydrant or flushing valve is allowed on any length of 6-inch
diameter line.

d. Use minimum 8-inch diameter pipe for lines over 1000 feet long or when 2 or
more fire hydrants or flushing valves are required.

e. Pipes 12-inch diameter and larger shall be used as determined by the


Professional Engineer and approved by OCE Division.

7-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

f. Dead-end lines:

(1) Dead-end lines within public right-of-way


(a) On permanent dead ends, other than cul-de-sacs, the line shall be
6-inch diameter or larger, and shall not exceed more than 500 feet
in length from the closest interconnection main line and shall
terminate with a fire hydrant or flushing valve.
(b) In permanent dead-end situations within cul-de-sacs, reduce pipe
sizes successively. Carry 6-inch diameter pipe to the last hydrant,
then use 4-inch diameter pipe to the line's end. Place last service as
near as possible to the end and install standard 2-inch blowoff
valve and box at the end of the 4-inch diameter line. Maximum
length of this reduced line size configuration should not exceed
800 feet.

(2) Dead-end lines with one on-site fire hydrant or flushing valve
(a) Pipe with 6-inch diameter may be used for lengths less than 200
feet, provided domestic service is taken from end of line.
(b) Pipe with 8-inch diameter may be used for lengths greater than 200
feet but less than 500 feet, provided domestic service is taken from
end of line.

g. Install water lines that are located in side lot easements inside a continuous
steel casing pipe. Extend the casing uninterrupted from building line to
building line, except the length of the line shall not exceed 150 feet. No
horizontal or vertical deflections or connections are allowed. Construct
encased water line of restrained joint bell and spigot pipe to prevent lateral
movement. Provide casing spacers and end seals in accordance with Standard
Specifications.

7-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

C. Location and Depth of Cover

Table 7.1
WATER LINE LOCATION WITHIN A STREET RIGHT-OF-WAY

RIGHT-OF-WAY WIDTH & EXISTING OR 8" & 12"THRU 24" &


ANTICIPATED CURB FACE TO FACE PAVING WIDTH SMALLER(1) (2) 20"(1) (2) LARGER(1) (2)
100-FOOT ROW (ALL STREETS): 8 feet 7 feet 10 feet
80-FOOT ROW (ALL STREETS): 7 feet 6 feet 10 feet
60-FOOT ROW: 10 feet
MAJOR THOROUGHFARE: 44 feet 5 feet 5 feet 10 feet
COMMERCIAL, SCHOOL, PARK 40 feet 7 feet 6 feet 10 feet
RESIDENTIAL: 27 feet 12 feet (3) 12 feet (3) 12 feet (3)
50-FOOT ROW:
ALL STREETS: 35 feet 5 feet 5 feet 10 feet
ALL STREETS: 27 feet 7 feet 7 feet 10 feet

(1)
The number listed below is the maximum allowable distance from the right-of-way to the centerline
of the proposed water line.
(2)
The minimum distance from the right-of-way to the centerline of the proposed water line shall be 5
feet without a water line easement adjacent to the rights-of-way (see easements for requirements less
than 5 feet).
(3)
Investigate the possibility of a future 35-foot face-to-face curb-and-gutter section to replace existing
streets with roadside ditches.

1. Boulevard streets: When necessary, water lines may be located within the esplanade.
The lines should be located as near the centerline of street right-of-way as possible to
avoid conflict with future pavement widening.

2. Locations within an easement: Locate water lines 16-inch diameter and smaller in the
center of a 10-foot minimum width dedicated water line easement and water lines
larger than 16-inch diameter in the center of a 20-foot minimum width dedicated
water line easement. Do not locate lines 16-inch diameter and larger in side lot
easements. For location within side lot easements, see Chapter 5, Easement
Requirements. Obtain approval from OCE Division for lines to be located in wider or
multi-use easements.

3. When a water line is placed parallel to another utility line, other than a sanitary sewer,
and is located above the other utility, water lines 16-inch diameter and smaller shall
have a minimum of 4 feet horizontal clearance from outside wall of the water line to
outside wall of the other utility.

7-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

4. When a water line is placed parallel to another utility line, other than a sanitary sewer,
and is located below the other utility, the water line 16-inch diameter and smaller
shall have a minimum of 5 feet horizontal clearance from outside wall of the water
line to outside wall of the other utility.

5. Depth of cover

a. Provide the following minimum depths of cover from the top of curb for curb-
and-gutter streets or from mean elevation of the nearby ditch bottom and the
nearby right-of-way for open-ditch section:

Table 7.2
DEPTH OF COVER FOR WATER LINES

DEPTH OF COVER
SIZE OF LINE ABSOLUTE MINIMUM
TOP-OF-CURB OPEN-DITCH SECTION
12-INCH & SMALLER 4 feet 5 feet 3 feet
16-INCH & 20-INCH 5 feet 6 feet 3 feet
24-INCH & LARGER 6 feet 8 feet 4 feet

b. Whenever possible, changes in grade or alignment to clear utilities or


underground features should be accomplished by deflecting the pipe joints.
The use of regular bends for any change in grade will not be allowed without
prior approval from OCE Division for variance.

c. Use restrained joint pipe for lines 16-inch diameter and smaller with less than
4 feet or more than 8 feet of cover. The following direct bury alternates may
be used:
(1) Ductile iron pipe pressure class 250 with approved restrained joints.
(2) PVC pipe with ductile iron integral restrained joints, epoxy lined and
coated fittings. Use 250 psi AWWA C900 DR 14 for vertical offsets.
(3) Use only ductile iron and PVC products listed on OCE Division
approved products list.

D. Appurtenances

1. Do not place appurtenances under pavement. Obtain approval from OCE Division for
variances.

2. Valves

a. Spacing - set at maximum distances along the line as follows:

7-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

(1) 4-inch through 12-inch diameter - 1000 feet.


(2) 16-inch and 20-inch diameter - 2000 feet.
(3) 24-inch diameter and larger - obtain OCE Division approval.
(4) Total number of valves at any water line intersection shall equal total
number of lines leading out from the intersection point minus one,
three valves for a cross, and two valves for a tee.

b. Location:
(1) Normally, locate valves at street intersections along the street right-of-
way lines projected across the water line. Tapping sleeves and valves
are excluded from this requirement.
(2) Isolate fire hydrants and flushing valves from the water line with a
valve located in the fire hydrant or flushing valve branch. This valve
shall not be located in the slope or flowline of roadside ditches.
(3) Intermediate valves, not located on the projection of the right-of-way
line, shall be located on lot lines or 5 feet from fire hydrants but not set
in driveways.
(4) Locate valves a minimum of 9 feet horizontally from sanitary sewer
crossings.
(5) Valves located near reducers shall be located on the smaller diameter
pipe.

c. Valve Type (Unless otherwise specified):


(1) 20-inch and smaller - Gate valves.
(2) 24-inch and larger - Butterfly valves.

3. Fire Hydrants and Flushing Valves

a. Spacing:
(1) Single-family residential development - 500-foot maximum spacing.
(2) All other developments - 350-foot maximum spacing.

b. Location in or along street right-of-way:


(1) Locate fire hydrants primarily at street intersections.
(2) Locate fire hydrants at PCS of the intersection curb radius, 3 feet
behind curb or projected future curb.
(3) On streets with roadside ditches, set the fire hydrants within 5 feet of
rights-of-way lines.
(4) Set intermediate fire hydrants on lot lines, as extended to pavement,
when located between right-of-way intersections. These locations may
be adjusted 5 feet either way to avoid driveways or obstructions. In
either case, do not locate fire hydrants closer than 3 feet from curbed
driveways or 5 feet from non-curbed driveways.
(5) Fire hydrants may be set in the esplanade section of City streets when
locations at back of curbs are not feasible. In such cases, the preferred

7-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

location is 7 feet behind back of curb to provide access for parkway


mower. In no instance shall the fire hydrant be closer than 3 feet from
back of esplanade curb or closer than 10 feet from esplanade nose.

c. Location of fire hydrants or flushing valves outside street rights-of-way:


(1) The City Fire Marshall will establish and approve the location of fire
hydrants and flushing valves in apartment complexes, platted private
street developments, and other multi-family developments within the
City and within the City's ETJ.
(2) Locate fire hydrants and flushing valves in protected, easily-accessible
areas behind curb lines.
(3) For fire hydrants or flushing valves which are located adjacent to
water lines constructed in 10-foot wide water line easements, the fire
hydrant or flushing valve shall be centered in a minimum 10-foot by
10-foot separate easement.
(4) For commercial developments inside the City and ETJ, provide
isolation valves at each end of fire loops requiring on-site fire
hydrants.

d. Fire hydrants shall be designed to have a 4-foot bury where possible. As a


normal policy bends or offsets in fire hydrant branch will not be allowed.
Bends may be used to maintain a 4-foot bury or to maintain 3-foot back of
curb with prior approval from OCE Division.

4. Fittings

a. Normally use "all bell" (designated AB) for fittings. Properly designed thrust
blocks shall be provided for each AB fitting for diameters 12-inch and
smaller.

b. Provide fittings with approved restraint joints for diameters 16-inch and
larger. Show length of restrained joints on drawings in the profile view.

c. Use plugs with retention clamps and carrying the designation "plug and
clamp." Do not use thrust blocks at end of plug. See Paragraph 7.03H.2 for
additional requirements.

d. Connections to existing water lines 4-inch diameter and larger, shall be made
with tapping sleeve, and valve with valve box.

E. Water Meter Service

1. Water meter service for lines in or along street rights-of-way. Locate in areas with
easy access and with protection from traffic and adjacent to rights-of-way whenever
possible. Do not locate meters in areas enclosed by fences.

7-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

a. Meters 2 inches and smaller: Locate in rights-of-way, water line easements, or


in a minimum 5-foot by 5-foot separate water meter easement. Provide
concrete meter boxes for meters located under sidewalks.

b. Meters 3 inches to 6 inches: Locate in minimum 10-foot by 20-foot separate


water meter easement.

c. Meters 8 inches and larger: Locate in minimum 15-foot by 25-foot separate


water meter easement.

d. Separate tap and service lead shall be designed for each meter. Meter, line
size, and appurtenances shall conform to the latest edition of the Uniform
Plumbing Code.

2. Refer to Submittals Paragraph, and Drawings Paragraph of this Chapter, for approval
and drawing requirements for meter service leads 4-inch diameter and larger, and
metered sprinkler connections.

3. For proposed apartments or townhomes in private street developments, provide one


master meter sized for the entire development. Exceptions may be granted by OCE
Division. If an exception is approved, do not interconnect multiple meters.

4. For commercial developments with on-site water mains in easements for fire
protection, provide fire service meters adjacent to the public right-of-way. If a dual
feed is desired, both feeds shall be metered. An above-ground, reduced pressure,
zone-type backflow preventer shall be installed on the water line downstream from
the meters.

5. Do not install stubouts for future water services.

6. Show meter sizes for 1-1/2 inch or larger water meters.

F. Water Line Crossings

1. Public and private utility crossings other than sanitary sewer: Where a water line
crosses another utility other than a sanitary sewer, a minimum of 12 inches of
clearance must be maintained between the outside wall of the water line and the
outside wall of the utility.

2. Stream, ditch, or aerial crossings

a. Elevated crossings, general:


(1) Elevated crossings are preferred to underground crossings.
(2) Design elevated crossings with the elevation of the bottom of the
water line above the low chord of the nearest adjacent bridge or a

7-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

minimum 1-1/2 feet above the 100-Year Floodplain Elevation,


whichever is greater.
(3) Water lines shall be steel pipe and shall extend a minimum of 15
feet beyond the last bend or to the right-of-way line of the
crossing, whichever is greater.

b. Elevated crossings on existing structures:


(1) 12-inch diameter and smaller water lines supported on existing or
proposed bridges, must meet the following criteria. Coordinate
location of lines, in advance, with OCE Division.
(a) Have adequate structural capacity.
(b) Have sufficient clearance above bent cap elevation for
installation under the bridge.

c. Elevated crossings on separate structures:


(1) Use a separate elevated supporting structure for 16-inch diameter
and larger water lines unless otherwise approved by OCE Division.
Locate separate structures a minimum of 10 feet clear from other
existing or proposed structures.
(2) Support the line on columns spaced to accommodate structural
capacity of the pipeline considering deflection and loading.
(3) Base column support design on soil capacity, spacing, loading, and
structural requirements.
(4) Provide sufficient span length to accommodate the cross section of
future widening of the stream or ditch, if available.
(5) Provide appropriately sized air release valves at the highest point
of the water line.
(6) Provide pedestrian pipe guards on elevated crossings.

d. Underground Crossings:
(1) Provide a minimum 5-foot clearance above top of pipe to the
ultimate flow line of the ditch.
(2) Provide sufficient length to exceed the ultimate future development
of the stream or ditch.
(3) Water lines shall be restrained joint pipe and shall extend a
minimum of 15 feet beyond the last bend or to the right-of-way
line of the crossing, whichever is greater.

3. TxDOT and County Road Crossings

a. Extend carrier pipe from right-of-way to right-of-way.

b. Use restrained joint pipe in steel casing under existing and future roadway
from a point 5 feet outside of the service road or outside of pavement
toward the right-of-way, to a similar point on the other side of the highway

7-8
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

across the right-of-way. For highway or roadway crossings with open-


ditch sections, extend casing from right-of-way to right-of-way.

c. Where additional right-of-way has been acquired, or is being acquired, for


future widening, the casing shall extend to within 10 feet of each right-of-
way line.

4. Railroad Crossings

a. For mainline and spurline railroad crossings, the water line material shall
conform to Railroad requirements and have restrained joint pipe within a
steel casing which extends from right-of-way to right-of-way, but no less
than 30 feet from the center line of the outside rails.

b. For crossings on rights-of-way not owned by a railroad, extend casing 20


feet either side from the centerline of the outside rails.

5. Additional Requirements

a. Use electrically isolated flange joints for transitions between two


dissimilar metallic pipes. Electrically isolate water lines from casing pipe
and supports.

b. The carrier pipeline shall extend a minimum of 1 foot beyond the end of
the casing to allow flanged joints to be constructed.

6. Oil and Gas Pipeline Crossings: Do not use metallic pipe when crossing oil or
gas transmission lines unless a properly designed cathodic system is implemented
with OCE Division approval. Other pipe may be used, regardless of depth,
subject to approval by OCE Division. Maintain a minimum 2-foot vertical
separation between the pipeline and water line.

7. On-site Fire Loops within Commercial Developments

a. For commercial developments inside the City and in the ETJ requesting
on-site water mains, comply with the following requirements to allow
maintenance and future repair operations:
(1) Do not allow placement of structures, paved parking or equipment
pads over the easement.
(2) Provide 20-foot-wide longitudinal pavement joints along easement
lines where the water line is located under driveway or street
pavement.

G. Auger Construction: Use the following general criteria for establishing auger sections:

7-9
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

1. Improved streets - Use auger construction to cross a street regardless of surface.


Auger length shall be computed as roadway width at proposed auger location plus
5 feet to either side of roadway.

2. Driveways - Use auger construction to cross active driveways. Compute auger


length as driveways width plus 1 foot to either side. Where proposed lines are in
close vicinity and parallel to culvert pipes along roadside ditch streets, the length
of auger shall be the same as the length of existing culvert plus 1 foot either end.

3. Trees - Use auger construction to cross within 10 feet of trees 6 inches and larger
in diameter. Use a minimum auger length to clear the tree canopy.

4. See the Drawings Chapter of this section for auger construction drawing
standards.

H. Circulation and Flushing for Water Quality: The layout of the water distribution system shall
provide maximum circulation of water to prevent future problems of odor, taste, or color due
to stagnant water.

1. Provide a source of fresh water at each end or at multiple points of a subdivision.


Provide ways to create circulation and place valves and fire hydrants to allow simple
flushing of lines.

2. Where stubs are provided for future extensions, isolate the stubs with a valve and do not
allow service connections to stubs until extended. Provide the following length of
restrained pipe upstream of the plug.

Table 7.3 LENGTH OF RESTRAINED PIPE AT DEAD ENDS

DEPTH OF COVER (1)


MINIMUM RESTRAINED
SIZE OF LINE
OPEN-DITCH PIPE LENGTH
TOP-OF-CURB
SECTION
12-INCH & SMALLER 4 feet 5 feet 88 feet

16-INCH & 20-INCH 5 feet 6 feet 140 feet


(2) (2) (2)
24-INCH & LARGER

(1)
Provide specific design for pipe with less than the specified minimum cover.
(2)
Provide specific design for pipe 24-inches and larger.

I. Interconnections

1. For interconnections between utility districts outside the City, written approval
must be given by the TCEQ.

7-10
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

2. A written agreement between the districts must be approved by the City and
recorded in the county records and furnished to the City.

3. Set meter at the point of connection in a separate easement sized to conform to


requirements of Chapter 5. Meter to conform to requirements given in the City of
Houston Standard Specifications and Standard Details.

4. Requirements for installation of a meter may be waived by the City, if provisions


are made in the agreement between the districts. In this event, a separate
easement, sized to conform to requirements of Chapter 5, and valves shall be
provided for future meter installation.

5. Agreement between districts shall provide for annexation of the meter site by one
district and shall require the installation of a meter. The installation and full cost
shall be provided by the district not annexing the meter site.

6. For connection to City water lines serving districts or areas outside the City,
written approval must be obtained from the TCEQ. No customer may take pump
suction directly from City water lines. If a customer has his own well or other
supply, an appropriate backflow preventer must be installed to prevent water from
flowing into City water lines. Conform to the procedures for connection to City
water lines in effect at the time of connection. Consult with the Public Utilities
Division for current requirements.

J. Proposed Water Lines Constructed near Sanitary Sewers and Force Mains

1. Proposed Water Lines Parallel to Sanitary Sewers and Force Mains: Locate water
lines a minimum of 9 feet horizontally apart, measured from outside wall to
outside wall, when parallel to sanitary sewers and 4 feet horizontally apart,
measured from outside wall to outside wall, when parallel to force mains. Use the
following procedure when stated separation cannot be achieved:

a. When a proposed water line is to parallel an existing sanitary sewer force


main or gravity sanitary sewer and the 9-foot minimum separation
distance cannot be maintained, the existing sanitary sewer shall be
replaced with lined ductile iron pipe or PVC pipe meeting ASTM
specifications, having a minimum working pressure rating of 150 psi or
greater and equipped with pressure-type joints.

b. The water lines, sanitary sewers, or force mains, shall be separated by a


minimum vertical distance of 2 feet, and a minimum horizontal distance of
4 feet, measured between the nearest outside walls of the pipes. In all
cases, locate 20-inch diameter and smaller water lines above gravity sewer
lines.

7-11
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

2. Proposed Water Lines Crossing Sanitary Sewers and Force Mains


.
a. No protection is required if the sanitary sewer is 9 feet below the water
line.

b. Use the protective requirements given in Table 7.4, Protection


Requirements at Water Line - Sanitary Sewer Crossings, and Table 7.5,
Protection Requirements at Water Line - Force Main Crossings, for
sanitary sewer crossings not 9 feet below the water line.

7-12
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

Table 7.4
PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS AT
WATER LINE (WL) - SANITARY SEWER (SS) CROSSINGS

PROPOSED WATER LINE SANITARY SEWER


OVER UNDER OVER UNDER
EXISTING SS PROP SS EXISTING SS PROP SS EXISTING WL PROP WL EXISTING WL PROP WL
Minimum 2 feet vertical clearance
31 31 32 3 36 3 3 31
Place 1 full section (min 18 ft) of WL centered
at SS crossing. Provide restrained joints on
WL, spaced at least 9 ft horizontally from
3 3 3 3 36 3 3
centerline of SS
Place 1 full section (min 18 ft) of SS centered at
WL crossing. Provide restrained joints on SS,
3 37 36 37 3 3
spaced at least 9 ft horizontally from centerline
of WL
Replace 1 full section of existing SS with
pressure-rated DIP or pressure rated PVC pipe
with adapters and restrained joints centered at 3 3,4 3 4,7 36
WL crossing
Provide DIP for small diameter WL (less than
24 inches), PVC pipe is only allowed if encased
3 3 36 3
as per TAC § 290.44, and use restrained joints
for both DIP and PVC pipe
Embed SS with CSS for the total length of 1

pipe segment plus 1 foot beyond the joints on 3 3,4 35 34 35 35, 6 35 35 35


each end and meet 290.44(e)(4)(B)(vi)

1. Minimum clearance is 2 feet for non-pressure rated SS and 6 inches for pressure rated SS (with at least 150 psi pressure rating)
2. Minimum clearance is 2 feet for non-pressure rated SS and 1 foot for pressure rated SS
3. Required if existing SS is disturbed and/or there is evidence of leakage
4. Not required for augered WL unless there is evidence of leakage; completely fill augered hole with bentonite/clay mixture
5. Not required for augered SS; completely fill augered hole with bentonite/clay mixture
6. Not allowed, Requires approval of City Engineer
7. Both Waterline and Wastewater Main or Lateral must pass a pressure and leakage test as specified in AWWA C600 standards

7-13
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

Table 7.5
PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS AT
WATER LINE(WL) - FORCE MAIN (FM) CROSSINGS

PROPOSED WATER LINE PROPOSED FORCE MAIN


OVER UNDER OVER UNDER
EXISTING FM PROP FM EXISTING FM PROP FM EXISTING WL PROP WL EXISTING WL PROP WL
Minimum 2 feet vertical clearance
31 31 32 3 36 3 3 31
Place 1 full section (min 18 ft) of WL centered
at FM crossing. Provide restrained joints on
WL, spaced at least 9 ft horizontally from
3 3 36 3 3 3
centerline of FM
Place 1 full section (min 18 ft) of FM centered at
WL crossing. Provide restrained joints on FM,
spaced at least 9 ft horizontally from centerline
3 3 3
of WL
Replace 1 full section of existing FM with
pressure-rated DIP or pressure rated PVC pipe
with adapters and restrained joints centered at 3 3,4 34
WL crossing
Provide DIP for small diameter WL (less than
24 inches), PVC pipe is only allowed if encased
as per TAC § 290.44, and use restrained joints
3 36 36
for both DIP and PVC pipe
Embed FM with CSS for the total length of 1
pipe segment plus 1 foot beyond the joints on 3 3,4 35 34 35 35 35 35 35
each end
Place 1 full section (min 18ft) of min 150psi FM
centered at WL crossing. Provide restrained
joints on FM, spaced at least 9 ft horizontally
from centerline of WL. OR Encase in a joint of
3 3 3
150 psi pressure pipe (min 18ft) two nominal
sizes larger with spacers at 5ft interval.

1. Minimum clearance is 2 feet for non-pressure rated FM and 1 foot for pressure rated FM
2. Minimum clearance is 2 feet for non-pressure rated FM and 1 foot for pressure rated FM
3. Required if existing FM is disturbed and/or there is evidence of leakage
4. Not required for augered WL unless there is evidence of leakage; completely fill augered hole with bentonite/clay mixture
5. Not required for augered FM; completely fill augered hole with bentonite/clay mixture
6. Waterline must pass a pressure and leakage test as specified in AWWA C600 standards

7-14
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

3. Sanitary Sewer Manholes: Provide a minimum 9-foot clearance from outside wall
of existing or proposed manholes unless manholes and connecting sewers can be
made watertight and tested for no leakage. If a 9-foot clearance cannot be
obtained, the water line may be located closer to the manhole when prior approval
has been obtained from OCE Division by using one of the procedures below;
however, in no case shall the clearance be less than 4 feet.

a. Encase water line in a steel casing pipe. Install by open-cut construction.


Backfill with compacted cement-stabilized sand backfill.

b. Water lines 12-inch diameter and smaller may be augered past the
manhole with one full section of pipe, minimum 150 psi, with approved
restrained joints, installed centered about the existing sanitary manhole
with pressure grouting using a bentonite/clay mixture.

4. Fire Hydrants: Do not install fire hydrants within 9 feet of sanitary sewers and
force mains regardless of construction.

5. TCEQ Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems, including any approved
City variances shall apply if they are more strict than these guidelines or if they
are not covered by these guidelines.

7.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to the following submittal requirements in addition to those of Chapter 1 -


General Requirements.

B. Water Line Sizes: Submit justification, calculations, and locations for proposed 2inch
diameter lines and for lines 12-inch diameter and larger, for approval by OCE Division,
unless pipe sizes are specified to the design engineer by OCE Division.

C. Water Meter Service

1. For construction inside city limits, submit an application for meter services and
metered sprinkler connections, to the Taps and Meters Section, prior to
construction.

2. Submit requests for more than one service meter for townhomes in proposed
private street developments to OCE Division.

D. Master Development Plan: For multiple phase developments, submit a master


development plan. If within the ETJ, submit an overall district plan prior to the drawings
being submitted for first phase construction.

7-15
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

E. Interconnections

1. Submit to the TCEQ requests for written approval of:

a. Connection of City water lines to serve districts or areas outside city


limits.

b. Interconnections of districts.

2. Submit copies of approvals received from TCEQ to OCE Division.

7.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prepare calculations and construction drawings under the supervision of a Professional


Engineer trained and licensed under the disciplines required by the drawings. The final
design drawings must be sealed, signed, and dated by the Professional Engineer
responsible for development of the drawings.

7.06 DESIGN ANALYSIS

A. Water Line Sizes: Analyze system requirements to determine line sizes, unless sizing is
provided to the design engineer by OCE Division in advance.

B. Elevated Stream, Ditch, or Aerial Crossings: Prepare appropriate design calculations for
the supporting structure.

7.07 DRAWINGS

A. Conform to the following drawing requirements in addition to those of Chapter 3,


Graphic Requirements and the City’s standard water line details and Standard
Specifications.

B. Provide a cross section drawing (plan and profile) of branch water lines that extend
perpendicularly from main water lines when:

1. Branch line extends 20 feet or more, and

2. Branch lines have vertical bends.

C. Appurtenances: Identify, describe, and enclose in rectangular box on drawings.

1. Valves

a. Designate 2-inch through 20-inch gate valves with box as GV&B.

7-16
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works and Engineering Water Line Design Requirements

b. Provide complete description and size for other valves.

2. Water meters, service leads, and un-metered sprinkler connections

a. Show the location of service line tees, tapping sleeve and valves, valve
boxes, and temporary plugs to be installed to serve future 3-inch diameter
or larger meters.

b. Develop plan and profile sheets for 4-inch diameter and larger leads and
connections that cross public rights-of-way or other public utilities.

D. Construction Features

1. Show special construction features required to complete the project in a safe,


convenient, and economical manner.

2. Auger Construction

a. If the construction is predominately open cut, all portions of the street that
must be augered shall be clearly shown on drawings by location and
length. Include designation for auger sections adjacent to trees with 6
inches or larger diameters located within 10 feet of water line.

b. If construction is predominately by auger:


(1) Clearly show on drawings, areas in which auger pits will not be
permitted, by location and length.
(2) Clearly identify areas where special pipe material or offset sections
are required to comply with these guidelines.

3. Do not locate horizontal bends within street intersections between curb returns.

4. Curbs: Include a requirement on drawings for construction of wheelchair ramps at


street intersections where curbs are to be removed or are damaged by water line
construction. Conform to latest edition of City standards for wheelchair ramps.

END OF CHAPTER

7-17
07-01-2009
City of Houston
Design Manual

Chapter 8
WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEM
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

Chapter 8

WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

8.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Criteria for the design of wastewater collection systems.

B. This Chapter addresses the design of the wastewater collection systems within the public
right-of-way or a dedicated public easement. Sanitary sewers located on private property, that
are not in a dedicated easement, are under the jurisdiction of the Plumbing Code, and will be
reviewed by the Code Enforcement Division.

8.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to the list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements.

B. City of Houston Engineering Design Manual for Submersible Lift Stations.

C. City of Houston Design Guideline Drawings for Submersible Lift Stations.

8.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Public Sewer - A closed conduit which conveys wastewater flow and which is located within
the public right-of-way or dedicated public easement. A public sewer (or public sewer
system) is intended to serve more than one residential, commercial, or industrial site.

B. Private Sewer - A closed conduit which conveys wastewater flow and is constructed and
maintained by a private entity (i.e., homeowner's association). Private sewers may be located
in areas such as a private street or common area. Private sewers are subject to the design and
construction requirements of the Plumbing Code and must discharge to a public sewer.

C. Sewer Main - A sewer which receives the flow from one or more lateral sewers.

D. Lateral Sewer - A sewer running laterally down a street, alley, or easement which receives
flow only from abutting property.

E. Building Connection Easement - An easement dedicated to the City of Houston which allows
a property owner to extend a private sewer or service connection across adjacent property, or
properties, to facilitate connection to a public sewer. A building connection easement shall be
10 feet wide (minimum).

F. Service Lead - A sewer which branches off of a public sewer and extends to the limits of the
public right-of-way. It shall be construed as having reference to a public sewer branching off

8-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

from a main or lateral sewer to serve one or more houses, single-family lots, or other types of
small land tracts situated in the same block, but not directly adjacent as the main or lateral
sewer. Such a line shall never exceed 150 feet in length. If the sewer is designed to serve
more than two houses, or the equivalent of two single-family residences along a street, a
lateral sewer as defined above shall be constructed.

G. Service Connection - A private sewer from a single source to the main or lateral sewer in the
street, alley, or adjacent easement. Service connections are covered by the building code. If
routed through another tract of land, it shall be located in a building connection easement. If
located within a private easement, the City must be included as a third party in the easement
documents. It will be owned and maintained by the owner of the property being served by the
private sewer.

H. Project Area - The area within the immediate vicinity of a public sewer to be constructed.

I. Stack - A riser pipe constructed on main or lateral sewers which are deeper than 8 feet to
facilitate construction of service leads or service connections.

J. Force Main - A pressure-rated conduit (i.e., ductile iron pipe, pressure-rated PVC, etc.)
which conveys wastewater from a pump station to a discharge point.

8.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawings to be Furnished

1. Before any main or lateral sewer is constructed and before a permit will be issued for
the construction, plan-and-profile sheets of the proposed sewer shall be prepared and
submitted to the City for approval.

2. On projects within the city limits, the tracing shall become the property of the City
and shall remain on file in the City for use by any person who may be interested in
the project.

B. Details to be shown on Drawings: The detailed drawings will show the exact location of the
proposed line in the street, alley, or easement with respect to the edge of the particular right-
of-way, the transit base line, and any nearby utilities, 100-year flood elevation within the
project area, major landscaping, and other structures affecting construction.

C. Main and Lateral Sewers

1. Sewers shall be identified by number, letter, or other identification as shown on the


sanitary sewer layout sheet and manholes identified by letter or number.

8-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

2. Sewers in curved easements, easements defined by property lines and combined


easements containing other public utilities must be shown in both plan-and-profile
views.

3. The profile shall show other underground and surface utilities and facilities, both in
parallel and at crossings; the size, grade of the proposed line, the elevations of the
proposed line to hundredths of a foot at manholes, changes of grade and dead ends;
and the proposed finished grade over the sewer. It should show the actual ground line
as it exists prior to construction of the sewer. Where proposed fill or cut is
contemplated, the proposed new ground line should be shown as a separate line from
the actual ground line. Type of pipe and bedding shall comply with City of Houston
Standard Specifications and Standard Details.

4. Where sewers are to be placed between existing pavement and the street right-of-way
line (or interior easement line) or under existing pavement or topping, show the
existing ground line at both sides (or the closest side for sewers near the edge) of the
right-of-way or adjacent sewer easement.

D. Plan and Profile Required for Sewer Mains.

1. Sanitary sewer layouts for single-family residential subdivisions should use a scale of
100 feet or less per inch. A scale of 200 feet per inch may be used provided the
following information is shown on the layout:

a. All easements containing or buffering sanitary sewers are shown and labeled
both as to width and type; sewer sizes are shown at points of size changes;
manhole locations are shown.

b. The sewer alignment shall accurately reflect the relative location of the sewer
as shown on the detailed plan view.

c. Service leads that cross street pavement or serve adjacent property are to be
shown on the layout. The detail plans and profiles shall show the flow lines of
service leads at the street or easement right-of-way.

d. The number and size of the lots depicted on both the overall sewer layout
sheet and the individual plan-and-profile sheets shall match the number and
size of the lots depicted on the final plat after recordation.

e. The size and direction of flow for existing and proposed sewers shall be
shown on the overall sanitary sewer layout sheet.

f. The location of the proposed sewer within either the public right-of-way, a
dedicated easement adjacent to the public right-of-way, or side lot easement
(if allowed by the City).

8-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

g. The overall sanitary sewer layout sheet shall show the area, in acres, which
the proposed sewer is designed to serve. Include a location map which
references the acreage to nearby major thoroughfares and boulevard streets.
The scale of the location map shall be 1" = 2000' or less.

2. Commercial sanitary sewer layouts for large areas and with a scale of 400 feet or
more per inch must have an additional set of layouts at not more than 200 feet per
inch, with match lines and a small index map showing which portion of the overall
layout that the layout of each sheet represents.

3. Acceptable horizontal scales for the detailed plan-and-profile views are 10 feet, 20
feet, 40 feet, and not more than 50 feet maximum per inch. Horizontal scale for major
thoroughfares and boulevard streets shall be 1" = 20' or less.

4. Acceptable vertical scales for detailed profile views are 2 feet, 4 feet, and not more
than 5 feet maximum per inch unless otherwise approved. Vertical scale for major
thoroughfares and boulevards shall be 1" = 2' or less.

5. The plan view shall show, at a minimum, the following information for the project
area:

a. Topographical features.

b. Stationing for the proposed sewers.

c. Existing utilities (i.e., telephone, gas, HL&P, etc).

d. Any significant landscaping or other structures which might impact


construction or construction-related activities.

e. The width and type of existing and proposed easements.

f. Proposed service leads.

g. The limits of bore or tunnel.

h. Locations where pressure pipe is to be installed for water line crossings.

6. The profile view shall show, at a minimum, the following information for the project
area:

a. Underground and surface utilities/facilities which are either parallel to the


proposed sewer or cross the proposed sewer.

b. The proposed sewer's diameter and grade for each manhole section.

8-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

c. The flowline elevation for sanitary sewers at each manhole.

d. The rim elevation of existing and proposed manholes.

e. The flowline elevation at each sheet break (i.e., from one sheet to another).

f. Type of pipe bedding and backfill shall be included in the Standard Details.

g. The finished grade for proposed and existing pavement. Where cut and fill are
proposed, the proposed new ground line should be shown as a separate line
from the existing ground line.

h. The existing ground line for the near side of the public right-of-way where a
sewer is to be placed between the edge of existing pavement and the edge of
the public right-of-way.

i. The existing ground line at the centerline of the proposed sanitary sewer
where a sanitary sewer is to be placed within an existing easement. Show any
proposed cut and fill as described above. Show the finished grade of any
proposed and existing pavement.

j. The flowline elevation of service leads where the service lead crosses the edge
of the public right-of-way or the dedicated easement adjacent to the public
right-of-way.

k. The limits of bore or tunnel.

l. Locations where pressure pipe is to be installed for water line crossings.

m. The location of special backfill and proposed stacks shall be identified by


stations indicated on the design plans.

n. Avoid vertical breaks in the profiles. Include additional profile sheets where
depth of sanitary sewers warrant.

7. Drawings for single-family residential subdivisions shall show the proposed location,
by stations, of all service leads, service connections, and stacks.

E. Service Leads.

1. Service leads shall be located either at the property line between two adjoining lots,
or every 100 feet, whichever is less or as directed by the City. A single 6-inch service
lead located at the property line between two adjoining lots would serve two single-
family residences with a wye placed at the end of the service lead. Do not extend the
wye beyond the edge of either the public right-of-way or dedicated easement.

8-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

2. Any service lead extension of more than 50 feet parallel to the street right-of-way
shall be treated as a lateral sewer.

3. Service leads for single-family developments shall not connect to the manhole unless
otherwise stated in this manual. Service leads from developments with more than
5000 gallons-per-day flow shall discharge into a proposed or existing manhole.
Where the flow line of the service lead is 30 inches or greater above the flow line of
the manhole, provide a standard City of Houston drop manhole.

a. Service leads shall be provided to serve each lot within proposed


development, whether inside the city limits or in the ETJ. Provide detail
for typical near-side and far-side service leads.

b. Service leads shall be 6 inches in diameter (minimum). If the length of a


service lead exceeds 100 feet or the width of the public right-of-way by more
than 20 feet, the minimum diameter shall be 8 inches and a manhole shall be
utilized for connection to the public sewer.

c. Service leads with a diameter of 6 inches shall utilize full body fittings
(extruded or factory-fabricated) for connection to a proposed public sewer or
an approved saddle-type connector for connection to an existing public sewer.

d. Saddle-type connectors shall be installed with the stub oriented between the
springline (3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions) and 45 degrees from the
springline (1:30 and 10:30 positions). Tees (i.e., full body fittings) shall be
oriented in the same manner.

e. The service lead shall be designed to minimize the use of bends as site
conditions will permit.

f. Service leads exceeding the limits defined in Paragraph 8.04E.2 shall have a
manhole at each end; as well as a plan-and-profile drawing for each right-of-
way crossing. All or part of these service leads which are located in a public
right-of-way, alley or dedicated sanitary sewer or public utility easement may
be treated as a public sewer; depending upon the location of the terminal
manhole and any intermediate manholes.

g. For existing lots (which are not served in accordance with these guidelines)
that need a service lead, if the distance to the nearest existing sewer is less
than 50 feet, the service lead is under the jurisdiction of the Plumbing Code.
h. The location where the service lead crosses the property line shall be shown
on the plans and marked in the field. Provide a typical detail of durable
marker placed where the service lead crosses the property line.

F. General Requirements

8-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

2. Connect to stacks and wyes or tees as shown. Where no stacks are shown, a licensed
plumber is responsible for placing a City-approved saddle for connection to the public
sewer and the City Inspector is responsible for determining that the saddle is
watertight and properly installed.

3. Materials and construction shall conform to latest City of Houston Standard


Specifications, including standard leak test.

4. Unless noted otherwise, all public sewers and service leads shall be embedded in
cement-stabilized sand from 6 inches below the pipe to 12 inches above the pipe and
for the full trench width. All such bedding shall be compacted to the density required
by Standard Specifications. Cement-stabilized sand shall have a 48-hour compressive
strength of 100 psi. The cross-section described in this paragraph is defined as the
embedment zone.

5. Backfill excavated areas and trenches under or within one foot of existing or
proposed pavement with cement-stabilized sand from the top of the pipe embedment
zone up to one foot below the paving subgrade. Cement-stabilized sand must develop
100 psi compression at 48 hours. Backfill shall be compacted to 95 percent standard
Proctor density.

5. The actual location of all special backfill and of proposed stacks shall be shown by
stations in the drawings.

6. Public sewers and force mains shall be located in either the public right-of-way or
easements. Side lot easements may be used only with special approval. Backlot
easements shall not be utilized except in cases of preexisting conditions as approved.
Generally, the location of the public sewer within a dedicated easement shall be along
the centerline of the easement. However, in those instances where the easement is
adjacent to the public right-of-way, the location of the sanitary sewer shall be
approved on a case-by-case basis by the Director, Department of Public Works and
Engineering. Required easement widths are addressed in Chapter 5, Easement
Requirements. Additional information regarding the location of sanitary sewers is
contained in Chapter 6, Utility Locations.

7. The final determination as to that portion of a street, alley, or easement to be occupied


by a proposed sewer rests within the City. The Director will take into consideration
existing, planned and proposed facilities such as manholes, pavement, pipes/conduits,
along with existing trees and shrubs, or other unique surface conditions when arriving
at a decision.

8. There shall be no closed-end easements for sanitary sewers.

9. The drawings for the sewer shall show the location of any existing known pipe or
duct that might interfere with the construction of the sewer and call to the attention of

8-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

the City any known obstacles that might be encountered in constructing the sewer in
any location under consideration. The Professional Engineer shall determine the
existence of pipes, ducts, and obstacles from a visual survey on the ground plus
research of public records and private records when available.

G. Line Size

1. The minimum pipe diameter for a public sanitary sewer shall be 8 inches.

2. Service leads 4 inches in diameter shall be confined to the limits of the lot which they
serve and shall serve only the equivalent of one single-family lot. No 4-inch sewer
shall be laid in any street, alley, or right-of-way.

3. Service leads 6 inches in diameter shall not serve more than the equivalent of 2
single-family lots or other types of small land tracts.

4. Service leads of 6-inch and 8-inch diameter for single-family residential lots shall
have a minimum grade of 0.70 percent and 0.44 percent respectfully.

5. For commercial service leads such as street bores, submit a copy of the approved
plumbing drawings to establish the required size of the line. The minimum size lead
shall be 8 inches in diameter downtown and 6 inches in diameter elsewhere.

6. Main and lateral sewers will end in manholes, except for special or unusual situations
and are subject to specific approval by the City.

7. Sewer lines shall be laid at a size and depth to conform to designs permitting an
orderly expansion of the sewer system of the City and so as to avoid a duplication of
lines in the future.

8. The City shall be the final judge as to sizes and depths required and exceptions to
lateral service leads as previously defined.

H. Line Depth

1. The sewer should be laid with the top of the pipe a minimum of 3 feet below the
surface of the ground.
2. Sewers laid in street rights-of-way with curb and gutter paved streets shall have a
minimum cover of 4 feet from the top of the pipe to top of the curb to anticipate
future sewer extension.

3. Sewers laid in street rights-of-way with crowned roads and side ditches shall have a
minimum cover of 6 feet from the average ground line at the adjacent street right-of
way to the top of pipe.

8-8
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

4. Where the minimum cover as specified in Paragraphs 8.04H.1, 8.04H.2, and 8.04H.3
is not possible, the sewer shall be laid with Class 150 (150 psi) pressure pipe with
cement stabilized sand backfill as shown in Standard Details. Ductile iron pipe shall
be lined with either a polyethylene or polyurethane coating as approved by the pipe
manufacturer and applied by either the pipe manufacturer or an approved applicator.
The minimum liner thickness shall be 40 mil.

5. Maximum depth for 8-inch-, 10-inch-, and 12-inch-diameter collection lines shall be
20 feet from average ground surface to pipe invert. Depths greater than 20 feet are
subject to approval by the City Engineer if justified for site specific reasons during
the preliminary engineering phase of the project design.

I. Line Grades

1. The following table lists the minimum grades for 6-inch to 27-inch diameter public
sewers. The minimum grade is based on a minimum full pipe velocity of 2.3 feet per
second (fps). The maximum recommended grade is based on a maximum full pipe
velocity of 4.5 fps. In both cases, the Manning Formula has been used with an n
coefficient of 0.013. The use of different pipe materials will not alter the use of 0.013
for the purposes of the Design Manual.

Table 8.1
MINIMUM GRADES FOR WASTEWATER LINES

NOMINAL INTERNAL PIPE MINIMUM GRADE TO DEVELOP


DIAMETER (INCHES) V=2.3 FPS (PERCENT)
6 0.65

8 0.44

10 0.33

12 0.26

15 0.19

18 0.15

21 0.13

24 0.11

27 0.087

2. For sewers larger than 27 inches in diameter, the Professional Engineer of record
shall determine the appropriate grade utilizing the Manning Formula, n=0.013 and a
minimum full pipe velocity of 3.0 fps.

8-9
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

J. Alignment: Gravity sewers shall be laid in straight alignment with uniform grade between
manholes. Deviations from straight alignment shall be justified by complying with the
TCEQ’s requirements and approved by the City. Deviations from uniform grade without
manholes shall not be allowed.

K. Manholes.

1. Type: Manholes shall be either precast concrete, per Standard Details; unless the
Professional Engineer submits a cast-in-place manhole design for review and
approval by the City. The Professional Engineer of record shall determine the need
for a liner or coating on concrete manholes. Liner or coatings will be in accordance
with the approved products as determined by the City of Houston Standard Products
Committee. Fiberglass manholes, per Standard Details, are allowed outside paved
areas. Precast manholes shall incorporate a boot-type connector for sewer diameters
up to 24 inches. For sewer diameters greater than 24 inches, utilize either the boot-
type connector (if available) or an integral gasket. Precast manholes shall conform to
the latest ASTM requirements. Manhole covers shall be 32 inches as shown in the
Standard Details. Variances will be considered for interior drops on existing
manholes.

2. Location: For public sewers, manholes shall be placed at changes in alignment,


changes in grade, junction points, and either at street, alley, or easement intersections
as designs may require.

a. Sewers laid in easements shall have a manhole in each street crossed by the
sewer.

b. The maximum distance between manholes shall be determined from the


following table for 8-inch to 48-inch pipe diameters. Spacings for manholes
on mains with diameters larger than 48 inches installed by tunneling methods
or open-cut methods shall be determined on an individual project basis.

Table 8.2
MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN
SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES

PIPE DIAMETER (I.D.) IN MANHOLE MAXIMUM


INCHES SPACING IN FEET
8-15 400

18-48 800

Greater than 48 As approved by the City

8-10
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

c. A design objective is to have sewers with the same, or approximately the


same, flowline elevation intersect each other at a 90-degree angle. However,
where a true perpendicular intersection cannot be obtained, and where the
entering sewer intersects the receiving sewer at, or about, the same flowline
elevation, one or more manholes shall be located so that a minimum angle of
80 degrees at the point of intersection can be achieved for the sewer line.
When the entering sewer is on the upstream side of the manhole, the minimum
angle between the sewers may be reduced to a 45 degree angle provided:

(1) A distinct flow channel can be maintained within the manhole when
the flowline elevations of the sewers are at or within one pipe diameter
of the smaller pipe; or
(2) When the flowline elevation of the entering pipe is above the crown of
the primary sewer and clearance can be provided between the sewers.

d. Place manholes at the dead-end of mains and laterals.

e. Existing manholes located within the city limit shall be identified by the
alphanumeric system established by the Department. Refer to Department’s
“GIMS” map.

f. Criteria for Connections to and Utilization of Manholes:

1. Connections between public sewers at the manhole shall adhere to the


following criteria when possible:

(a) The elevation of the crown of the discharging sewer shall either
match the elevation of the crown of the receiving sewer or be
approved as a special case by the City.
(b) A standard drop connection as shown in City of Houston
Standard Details is required when the difference in elevation
between discharging sewer flow line and receiving sewer flow
line is greater than 30 inches.

2. The routing of a service connection directly to an existing manhole


will be allowed only if:

(a) The flow line elevation of the existing sanitary sewer is more
than 10 feet below grade and there is no available stack and the
lot to be so connected is a single-family, owner-occupied,
single lot residence connection to an existing manhole; or
(b) The lot to be so connected is a single-family, single lot
connecting to a manhole at the end of a cul-de-sac.
(c) Satisfies discharge requirements of service leads requiring
manholes (see Paragraph 8.04E.3).

8-11
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

3. When routing an approved service connection to a manhole (see


Paragraph 8.04K.2.f (2)), the wall penetration shall not be greater than
10 inches in diameter and shall be sealed using an approved grout.

4. When routing an approved service connection to an existing manhole


(see Paragraph 8.04K.2.f (3)) with invert elevation more than 30
inches lower, the connections shall utilize a drop and shall adhere to
the following criteria:

(a) The manhole wall penetration shall not be greater than 10


inches in diameter;
(b) The drop shall be a minimum of 6 inches in diameter and shall
be constructed of SDR 26 PVC pipe (ASTM D 3034);
(c) The drop shall be located 45 degrees from the upstream side of
the main sewer;
(d) Usage of an internal drop will be reviewed on a case-by-case
basis. A minimum of 48 inches of clear space shall be
maintained inside the manhole and the drop shall be affixed to
the manhole wall utilizing stainless steel bands and anchor
bolts;
(e) An internal drop shall terminate with a 45 degree bend. The 45-
degree bend shall not extend below the top-of-pipe elevation of
receiving sanitary sewer; and
(f) The wall penetration shall be sealed using an approved grout.

5. Public sewers shall terminate in a manhole. Clean-outs will not be


utilized except at the end of each service lead.

L. Lift Stations.

1. Lift station design shall comply with the City of Houston Engineering Design Manual
for Submersible Lift Stations and Design Guideline Drawings for Submersible Lift
Stations, latest revision. The designer shall submit a Final Design Submittal Checklist
(available from the City), signed and sealed by the Design Engineer, to ensure that the
lift station is designed in compliance with the requirements of applicable codes and
regulations. Include a copy of the Engineering Design Report satisfying TCEQ
criteria.

2. Provide Level II controls for City lift stations. Level I controls may be used for non
City owned lift stations.

3. Wet wells.

8-12
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

a. Use procedures outlined in “Engineering Design Manual for Submersible Lift


Stations” to size wet wells. Verify the design with “Design Guideline
Drawings for Submersible Lift Stations.”

b. Provide adequate clearance between pumps.

4. Lift station site - Minimum size of 50 feet by 50 feet.

8.05 UNSEWERED BUILDING SITES AND SEPTIC TANK SUBDIVISIONS

A. Lot Size and Requirements.

1. Lot sizes shall be determined by the projected use of the property considering people
density, sewage requirements, soil tests (percolation tests performed and certified to
by the Professional Engineer) and public or private water supply, all in accordance
with the requirements of the latest edition of Chapter 285 of TCEQ regulations.

2. The location of the individual lot sewage treatment facilities and the location of the
private water well, if required, shall be shown on individual building drawings.

3. Platted subdivisions served by public water supply should provide for individual lots
having surface areas of at least 15,000 square feet.

4. Platted subdivisions served by individual water systems should provide for individual
lots having surface areas of at least 20,000 square feet.

5. Engineer shall conform to applicable county criteria for Paragraphs 8.05 A.3 and
8.05 A.4 if more stringent.

B. Commercial establishments require a septic system design prepared by a Professional


Engineer in accordance with the latest edition of Chapter 285 of TCEQ regulations. Building
permits for commercial buildings shall require a sewer availability letter approving a septic
system designed and sealed by a Professional Engineer.

8.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Preliminary Design - Submit the following for review and comment:

1. Copies of any documents which show approval of exceptions to the City design
criteria.

2. Design calculations for line sizes and grades.

3. Contour map for overall area.

8-13
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

4. Plan-and-profile sheets showing proposed improvements (City projects only).

5. Geotechnical soils report for the project (City projects only).

B. Final Design - Submit the following for approval:

1. Final documents of the above plus plan-and-profile sheets and geotechnical soils
reports for non-City projects.

2. Review prints.

3. Original drawings

4. Complete copy of specifications

5. A final engineering design report shall be developed following TCEQ Chapter 317
and submitted to the City for each project. This report shall bear the signed and dated
seal of a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas who is responsible for
the design.

8.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prepare calculations and construction drawings under the supervision of a Professional


Engineer trained and licensed under the disciplines required by the drawings. The final
construction drawings must be sealed, signed, and dated by the Professional Engineer
responsible for the development of the drawings.

8.08 RESEARCH REQUIREMENTS

A. Discuss project concepts outlining proposed features and usage with City of Houston,
Department of Public Works and Engineering.

B. Research existing utility and right-of-way information.

C. Verify that no restrictions exist that will deny approval of the project concept.

8.09 DESIGN ANALYSIS

A. Calculations of design flows for overall development project.

B. Calculations for design of any treatment plant required for the development.

C. Calculations for effect of the 25-year storm outfall from any proposed treatment plant.

8-14
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Wastewater Collection System Design Requirements

8.10 DRAWINGS

A. Drawings shall include layout sheets with contours, plan-and-profile sheets, and detail sheets
for special items and treatment plants.

END OF CHAPTER

8-15
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 9

STORMWATER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

Chapter 9

STORMWATER DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

9.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Criteria for the design of storm drainage improvements.

9.02 DRAINAGE POLICY

A. Design Requirements.

1. Drainage criteria administered by the City of Houston and complemented by Harris


County and the Harris County Flood Control District (HCFCD) for newly designed
areas provides protection from Structural Flooding from a 100-year storm event. This
is accomplished through application of various drainage enhancements, such as storm
sewers, roadside ditches, open channels, detention and overland (sheet) run-off. The
combined system is intended to prevent Structural Flooding from extreme events up
to a 100-year storm.

2. Recognizing that each site has unique differences that can enhance the opportunity to
provide proper drainage, the intent of these criteria is to specify minimum
requirements that can be modified provided that the objective for drainage standards
is maintained. For projects which require a site specific approach and where unique
engineering solutions will achieve drainage objective, a request for consideration of
alternative standards (pipe flow, overland sheet flow, and detention storage) shall be
submitted to the City of Houston Department of Public Works and Engineering,
Office of the City Engineer (1st floor-611 Walker), for review and approval.

B. Street Drainage: Street ponding of short duration is anticipated and designed to contribute to
the overall drainage capability of the system. Storm sewers and roadside ditch conduits are
designed as a balance of capacity and economics. These conduits are designed to convey less
intense, more frequent rainfalls with the intent of allowing for traffic movement during these
events. When rainfall events exceed the capacity of the storm sewer system, the additional
run-off is intended to be stored or conveyed overland in a manner that reduces the threat of
flooding to structures.

C. Overland Run-off: Proposed New Development, Redevelopment, or In-fill Development


shall not alter existing overland flow patterns and shall not increase or redirect existing Sheet
Flow to adjacent private or public property. Sheet Flow from the developed property shall
discharge only to the abutting public right-of-way. Where the existing Sheet Flow pattern is
blocked by construction (i.e. raising the site elevation) of the Development, the Sheet Flow
shall be re-routed within the developed property to return flow to original configuration or to
the public right-of-way. Except under special circumstances dictated by natural drainage

9-1
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

patterns, no Sheet Flow from the developed property will be allowed to drain onto adjacent
private property.

D. Flood Control: The City of Houston is a participant in the National Flood Insurance Program
(NFIP). The flood insurance program makes insurance available at low cost where the
municipal entity implements measures that reduce the likelihood of Structural Flooding. The
design criteria in this chapter are provided to support the NFIP. All development shall
comply with Chapter 19, FLOOD-PRONE AREAS, of the Code of Ordinances if located
within the City limits.

E. Relationship to the Platting Process: Approval of storm drainage is a part of the review
process for planning and platting of a New Development. Review and approval of plats is
conducted by the Department of Planning and Development. Review of storm drainage is
conducted by the Department of Public Works and Engineering (PWE).

F. Development in Areas that have Deficient Drainage Systems: The City will consider joint
project funding with a private entity for construction of drainage systems that improve
existing drainage infrastructure. The City’s first priority will be to fund those projects
included in the Capital Improvement Plan (CIP). Where feasible, City funding will be
leveraged with other funding sources including private entities, civic organizations, and other
public agencies (Harris County, HCFCD, Corps of Engineers, Housing and Community
Development, and other funding sources). For drainage systems that have been identified as
deficient and are not scheduled to receive funding in the current CIP, the City will consider
authorizing improvements performed by the private entity that comply with the City’s
objectives.

G. The criteria in this Chapter apply to all projects located in the City limits and to expanding
utility districts and new utility districts located in the City’s Extraterritorial Jurisdiction
(ETJ). If the criteria conflicts with Harris County, HCFCD, Fort Bend County, Montgomery
County or other jurisdictions the most restrictive criteria shall govern.

9.03 REFERENCES

A. Refer to the list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements.

B. National Weather Service Documents

1. TP-40 Rainfall Frequency Atlas of the United States.

2. Hydro-35; 5-to-60-Minute Precipitation Duration for the Eastern and Central United
States.

C. Hydraulic Engineering Circular No. 22, (HEC-22) Second Edition, “Urban Drainage Design
Manual”, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA).

9-2
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

D. ASCE Manual and Reports of Engineering Practice No. 77, Design and Construction of
Urban

E. HouStorm – The City of Houston’s version of The Texas Department of Transportation’s


(TxDOT) WinStorm software.

F. HCFCD Policy, Criteria, and Procedure Manual (HCFCD Criteria Manual).

9.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Conduit – Any open or closed device for conveying flowing water.

B. Continuity Equation:
Q = VA
Where: Q = discharge (cfs or cms)
V = velocity (ft/sec or m/sec)
A = cross sectional area of Conduit (square feet or
square meters)

C. Design Storm Event – Rainfall intensity upon which the drainage facility will be sized.

D. Development – The term includes New Development, Redevelopment, and In-fill


Development.

1. In-fill Development – Development of open tracts of land in areas where the storm
drainage infrastructure is already in place and takes advantage of the existing
infrastructure as a drainage outlet.

2. New Development – Development of open tracts of land in areas where the storm
drainage infrastructure has not been constructed and a drainage outlet must be
extended to a channel under the jurisdiction of the HCFCD.

3. Redevelopment – A change in land use that alters the impervious cover from one type
of Development to either the same type or another type, and takes advantage of the
existing infrastructure in place as a drainage outlet.

E. Drainage Area Map – Area map of watershed which is subdivided to show each area served
by each subsystem.

F. FEMA – Federal Emergency Management Agency.

G. HCFCD – Harris County Flood Control District.

H. HouStorm – The City of Houston’s version of TxDOT’s WinStorm software. The program
is available from the City or at www.swmp.org.

9-3
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

I. Hydraulic Grade Line - A line representing the pressure head (water surface elevation)
available at any given point within the drainage system.

J. Manning's Equation:
2/3 1/2
V = (K/n)R Sf
Where: K = 1.49 for English units,
1.00 for metric units
V = velocity (ft./sec or m/sec)
R = hydraulic radius (ft. or m) (area/wetted perimeter)
Sf = friction slope (headloss/length)
N = 0.012 for corrugated profile-wall polyethylene pipe
0.013 for concrete pipes,
0.015 for concrete boxes,
0.024 for CMP pipes

K. Rainfall Frequency - Probability of a rainfall event of defined characteristics occurring in any


given year at a given location. Information on Rainfall Frequency is published by the
National Weather Service. For the purpose of storm drainage design, the following
frequencies are applicable:

1. 2-year frequency - a rainfall intensity having a 50 percent probability of occurrence in


any given year, that occurs on the average every 2 years over a long period of time.

2. 3-year frequency - a rainfall intensity having a 33 percent probability of occurrence in


any given year, that occurs on the average every 3 years over a long period of time.

3. 5-year frequency - a rainfall intensity having a 20 percent probability of occurrence in


any given year, that occurs on the average every 5 years over a long period of time.

4. 10-year frequency - a rainfall intensity having a 10 percent probability of occurrence


in any given year, that occurs on the average every 10 years over a long period of
time.

5. 25-year frequency - a rainfall intensity having a 4 percent probability of occurrence in


any given year, that occurs on the average every 25 years over a long period of time.

6. 100-year frequency - a rainfall intensity having a 1 percent probability of occurrence


in any given year, that occurs on the average every 100 years over a long period of
time.

L. Rational Formula - A method for calculating the peak run-off for a storm drain system using
the following equation for run-off:
Q = I x (CA)
Where: C = watershed coefficient
A = area (acres)

9-4
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

I = rainfall intensity (inches per hour)

M. Sheet Flow - Overland storm run-off that is not conveyed in a defined Conduit and is
typically in excess of the capacity of the existing Conduit system.

N. Structural Flooding – The water surface elevation from the storm event exceeds the top of
slab elevation of the building (for pier and beam construction the top of first floor elevation),
resulting in water entering the structure.

9.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design of drainage facilities shall meet requirements of the City of Houston Standard
Specifications and Standard Details. HouStorm shall be used to perform design analysis and
design of storm drainage systems as follows:

1. City of Houston CIP Projects – Required. In conjunction with design analysis using
HouStorm, designs shall comply with guidelines provided in Technical Paper No. 100
(TP-100), Storm Sewer Design Applications for the City of Houston, Texas, Capital
Improvement Plan Projects, February 2005, or the latest published date.

2. Private Projects within City Limits which include City funding participation –
Required.

3. 100% Privately-funded Project located in City Limits – HouStorm preferred but


alternative equivalent analysis procedures will be accepted.

4. Projects in New or Expanding Utility Districts located in City’s ETJ - HouStorm


preferred but alternative equivalent analysis procedures will be accepted.

B. Determination of Run-off.

1. Design Storm Events.

a. Rainfall Duration:

(1) For design purposes, the rainfall duration for drainage areas less than
200 acres will be no less than 3 hours in duration.
(2) For design purposes, the rainfall duration for drainage areas more than
200 acres will be no less than 6 hours in duration.

b. Intensity-duration Curves. Figure 9.1, City of Houston IDF Curves, depicts


the intensity-duration curves to be used for storm sewer and roadside ditch
design in the City of Houston and the ETJ. These curves were derived from
the National Weather Service publications referenced in this Chapter.

9-5
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

2. Application of Run-off Calculation Models.

a. Rational Method: The rational method will be used for design on areas served
by storm sewers up to 600 acres in size and for areas served by roadside
ditches up to 500 acres in size.

b. Rainfall Run-off Modeling: Rainfall run-off modeling will be applied to areas


greater than 500 acres in size that are drained by an open channel. Rainfall
run-off modeling can be used for modeling of storm sewer areas greater than
600 acres provided the model considers the storage and ponding in streets. If
the modeling is associated with establishing a flood-prone area for purposes of
a FEMA submittal, the models must be acceptable to that agency.

3. Coefficients for the Rational Method.

a. Calculation of Run-off Coefficient.

(1) The run-off coefficient C values in the rational method formula will
vary based on the land use. Land use types and C-values which can be
used are as follows:

Land Use Type Run-off Coefficient (C)


Residential Districts
Lots more than 1/2 acre 0.35
Lots 1/4 - 1/2 acre 0.45
Lots less than 1/4 acre 0.55
Multi-Family areas
Less than 20 Service Units/Acre 0.65
20 Service Units/Acre or Greater 0.80
Business Districts 0.80
Industrial Districts
Light Areas 0.65
Heavy Areas 0.75
Railroad Yard Areas 0.30
Parks/Open Areas 0.18

(2) Alternatively, the run-off coefficient C in the rational method formula


can be calculated from the equation:
C = 0.6Ia + 0.2
Where: C = watershed coefficient
Ia = impervious area/total area
(3) If the alternate form is to be submitted, the calculation of C shall be
provided as part of the drainage calculations.

b. Determination of Time of Concentration.

9-6
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

Time of concentration can be calculated from the following formula:


TC = 10A0.1761+15
Where: TC = time of concentration (minutes)
A = subarea (acres)

c. Sample Calculation Forms.


(1) Figure 9.2, City of Houston Storm Sewer Calculation Form, is a
sample calculation form for storm sewer systems.
(2) Figure 9.3, City of Houston Roadside Ditch Worksheet, is a sample
calculation form for roadside ditch systems.

C. Design of Storm Sewers.

1. Design Frequency.

a. New Development: The Design Storm Event for sizing storm sewers in newly
developed areas will be a 2-year rainfall.

b. Redevelopment or In-fill Development: The existing storm drain (sewer,


ditch) will be evaluated using a 2-year design storm, assuming no
development takes place. The storm drain will then be evaluated for the 2-year
design event with the Development in place.

(1) If the proposed Redevelopment has a lower or equal impervious cover,


no modifications to the existing storm drain are required.
(2) If the proposed Development results in the hydraulic gradient of the
existing storm drain below the gutter line, no improvements to the
existing storm drain are required. Detention shall comply with
Paragraph 9.05.H. Flow discharged to the storm drain shall be in
compliance with Paragraph 9.05.H.4.b.
(3) If the analysis of the existing conditions finds that the existing storm
drain is deficient (i.e. the hydraulic grade line is above the gutter line),
the applicant should check with the City to see if a CIP project is
proposed that will require a capital contribution. If a CIP project is not
proposed for the subject system, then on-site detention will be required
in accordance with Paragraph 9.05.H. Flow discharged to the storm
drain shall be in compliance with Paragraph 9.05.H.4.b.

c. City Projects (CIP): Proposed City capital improvements may indicate a larger
diameter storm sewer is planned in the area proposed for drainage
improvements. The Engineering and Construction Division of PWE has
information on proposed improvements and should be consulted for impact on
New Development.

d. Private Drainage Systems: Storm sewers for private drainage systems should

9-7
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

conform to the City of Houston Uniform Building Code for development


within the City limits.

2. Velocity Considerations.

a. Storm sewers should be constructed to flow in subcritical hydraulic conditions


if possible.

b. Minimum velocities should not be less than 3 feet per second with the pipe
flowing full, under the design conditions.

c. Maximum velocities should not exceed 8 feet per second without use of
energy dissipation downstream.

d. Maximum velocities should not exceed 12 feet per second.

3. Pipe Sizes and Placement.

a. Use storm sewer and inlet leads with at least 24-inch inside diameter or
equivalent cross section. Box culverts shall be at least 2 feet by 2 feet. Closed
Conduits; circular, elliptical, or box, shall be selected based on hydraulic
principals and economy of size and shape.

b. Larger pipes upstream should not flow into smaller pipes downstream unless
construction constraints prohibit the use of a larger pipe downstream, or the
improvements are outfalling into an existing system, or the upstream system is
intended for use is intended for use in detention.

c. Match crowns of pipe at any size change unless severe depth constraints
prohibit.

d. Locate storm sewers in public street rights-of-way or in approved easements.


Back lot easements are discouraged and will require a variance from the City
design standards.

e. Follow the alignment of the right-of-way or easement when designing cast in


place concrete storm sewers.

f. A straight line shall be used for inlet leads and storm sewers.

g. Center culverts in side lot storm sewer easements.

4. Starting Water Surface and Hydraulic Gradient.

a. The hydraulic gradient shall be calculated assuming the top of the outfall pipe

9-8
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

as the starting water surface.

b. At drops in pipe invert, should the upstream pipe be higher than the Hydraulic
Grade Line, then the Hydraulic Grade Line shall be recalculated assuming the
starting water surface to be at the top of pipe at that point.

c. For the Design Storm, the hydraulic gradient shall at all times be below the
gutter line for all newly developed areas.

5. Manhole Locations.

a. Use manholes at the following locations:


(1) Size or cross section changes.
(2) Inlet lead and Conduit intersections.
(3) Changes in pipe grade.
(4) Street intersections.
(5) A maximum spacing of 700 feet measured along the Conduit run.

b. Use manholes for existing monolithic-concrete storm sewers at the same


locations as above except for intersections of inlet leads unless a manhole
is needed to provide maintenance access at those intersections.

c. Do not place manholes in driveways or in the street in front of or


immediately adjacent to a driveway.

6. Inlets.

a. Locate inlets at low points in the gutter.

b. Valley gutters across intersections are not permitted.

c. Inlet spacing is a function of gutter slope. The minimum gutter slope shall
comply with Chapter 10, Street Paving Design Requirements. For
minimum gutter slopes, the maximum spacing of inlets shall result from a
gutter run of 700 feet from high point in pavement or the adjacent inlet on
a continuously graded street section, with a maximum of 1400 feet of
pavement draining towards any one inlet location.

(1) Residential Development: Maximum spacing of inlets shall result


from a gutter run of 700 feet from high point in pavement to the
adjacent inlet on a continuously graded street section, with a
maximum of 1400 feet of pavement draining towards any one inlet
location.
(2) Commercial Development: Maximum spacing of inlets shall result
from a gutter run of 400 feet from high point in pavement to the

9-9
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

adjacent inlet on a continuously graded street section with a


maximum of 600 feet of pavement draining towards any one inlet
location.

d. Use only City of Houston standard inlets.

Table 9.1
STANDARD STORM SEWER INLETS

INLET APPLICATION CAPACITY DWG. NOS.


Type A Parking Lots/Small Areas 2.5 cfs 02632-01
Type B-B Residential/Commercial 5.0 cfs 02632-04
Type C Residential/Commercial 5.0 cfs 02632-06
Type C-1 Commercial 10.0 cfs 02632-06
Type C-2 Commercial 15.0 cfs 02632-06
Type C-2A Commercial 20.0 cfs 02632-06
Type D Parking Lots 2.0 cfs 02632-07
Type D-1 Small Areas 2.5 cfs 02632.08
Type E Roadside ditches 20.0 cfs 02632-09,-10
Type H-2 Residential Commercial 5.0 cfs 02633-01,-02

e. Do not use beehive grate inlets or other specialty inlets.

f. Do not use grate top inlets in unlined roadside ditch.

g. Do not place inlets in the circular portion of cul-de-sac streets unless


justification based on special conditions can be provided.

h. Place inlets at the end of proposed pavement, if drainage will enter or


leave pavement.

i. Do not locate inlets adjacent to esplanade openings.

j. For new residential development, locate inlets at the center of lots and
drainage system with lot site layout such that inlets are not located within
the driveway between the radius end points as defined by the driveway
radius intersection with the curb or edge of pavement.

k. Place inlets on side streets intersecting major streets, unless justification


based on special conditions can be provided.

l. For private development with internal site drainage, only one connection
is permitted to any one inlet, and that connection (lead) shall be made to
the back of the inlet. Connection shall not be made to the front face and to

9-10
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

the short sides of the inlet unless approved by the City. Design the
connection not to exceed the pipe capacity minus either the capacity listed
in Table 9.1, Standard Storm Sewer Inlets, or calculated inlet inflow.

m. For all new construction, convey public or private alleyway drainage to an


inlet prior to entering the public street drainage system.

D. Consideration of Overland Flow for the Extreme Event.

1. Design Frequency: Design frequency for consideration of overland flow shall


consider extreme storm events (100-year storm) which exceed the capacity of the
underground storm sewer system resulting in ponding and overland flow from the
Development to the primary outlet.

2. Design Analysis: An overland flow analysis of the proposed drainage system shall be
prepared by the design engineer. The design engineer shall submit supporting
calculations, exhibits, and drawings.

a. Three analysis methods as presented in Technical Paper No. 101,


Simplified 100-year Event Analyses of Storm Sewers and Resultant Water
Surface Elevations for Improvement Projects in the City of Houston,
Harris County, Texas Region will be acceptable to the City.

(1) Method 1: Hydraulic Grade Line (HGL) Analysis A simplified


approach to analyze and control the 100-year water surface
elevation (WSEL) can be achieved by designing the storm sewer
system for the 2-year frequency storm event; imposing a 100-year
frequency storm event on the proposed design; calculating the
hydraulic grade for the 100-year frequency event for the proposed
design; and adjusting the position of the HGL to not exceed the
desired water surface elevation by increasing the size of the
proposed storm sewer for selective reaches.
(2) Method 2: Qt = Qo + Qc
where Qt is the total flow conveyed,
Qo is the overland flow component, and
Qc is the calculated flow in the conduit for the 2-year design event.
The overland flow component (Qo) is computed by applying
Manning’s Equation to calculate the flow across the critical street
cross-section along the right of way. This method accounts for
flow in the storm sewer and overland flow across the street crest,
but does not account for street ponding or storage.
(3) Method 3: Qt = Qo + Qc + ∆S/T
where Qt, Qo, and Qc are as defined above, and
∆S/T is the change in storage volume relative to time provided in
the streets and adjacent area upstream of the point of interest being

9-11
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

analyzed. This method uses a volumetric calculation based on a


100-year frequency storm event with a duration of 3-hours for
developments less than 200 acre and 6-hours duration for
developments over 200 acres. The Soil Conservation Service, TR-
20 method is used to set a peak triangular hydrograph shape. This
method accounts for flow in the storm sewer, overland flow across
the street crest, and storage within the street and adjacent area.

b. Analysis using the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Storm


Water Management Model (SWMM) will be acceptable to the City.

3. Relationship of Structures to Street: All structures shall be higher than the highest
level of ponding anticipated resulting from the extreme event analysis.

4. The parameters stated below are independent measures that shall be evaluated for
each project. The limiting parameter will depend on project-specific conditions, and
the most restrictive condition (the lowest ponded water elevation) shall govern.

a. Streets shall be designed so that consecutive high points in the street will
provide for a gravity flow of drainage to the ultimate outlet.

b. The maximum depth of ponding at high points shall be 6 inches above top
of curb.

c. The maximum depth of ponding at low points shall be 18 inches above top
of curb.

d. Provide a minimum 20-foot easement to accommodate sheet flow that is


routed between lots or across reserve tracts in accordance with Section
5.07.C of the City of Infrastructure Design Manual. Fence lines and other
improvements shall not be constructed on or across dedicated drainage
easements.

e. A drawing(s) shall be provided to delineate extreme event flow direction


through a proposed Development and how this flow is discharged to the
primary drainage outlet. The drawing(s) shall show a profile of the
roadway (or overland flow path) from the upper reach of the drainage area
to the primary drainage outlet. The drawing(s) shall be exaggerated
vertical scale and shall include roadway profile at the gutter, ground
profile at the right-of-way, and the hydraulic gradient for the extreme
event (100-year storm), or an alternative equivalent drawing accepted by
the City.

f. In areas where ponding occurs and no Sheet Flow path exists, then a
calculation shall be provided showing that run-off from the 100-year event

9-12
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

can be conveyed and remain in compliance with the other requirements of


this paragraph.

g. Maximum Ponding Elevation

(1) The maximum ponding elevation for the 100-year event at any
point along the street shall not be higher than the natural ground
elevation at the right-of-way line. Where existing topographic
conditions, project location within a special flood hazard area,
and/or other site conditions preclude achieving this objective, the
City will waive this requirement upon submittal of documentation
and analysis prepared, signed, and sealed by a professional
engineer, registered in the State of Texas. Analysis shall
demonstrate that structural flooding will not occur.
(2) For new subdivisions the ponding elevations shall be no higher
than 12 inches below the proposed finished slab elevations, or, if
the proposed finished slab elevations are less than 12 inches above
the ground elevations at the right-of-way, the ponding elevations
shall be no higher than the ground elevations at the right-of-way.

5. Evacuation Routes and Emergency Service Routes. This standard applies to routes
designated by the PWE for emergency evacuation and for routes where access by the
emergency service vehicles is a public safety need. Ponding of surface runoff is not
allowed in the highest travel lane (each direction) for the 100-year event. Exceptions
to this standard based on technical infeasibility or cost limitations will require
approval of the Director, Public Works and Engineering Department, or his
designated representative. This standard may be modified or exempted for locations
in the 100-year floodplain.

E. Design of Open Channels.

1. Design Frequency.

a. Open channels shall be designed according to methods described in the


HCFCD Criteria Manual.

b. Design standards for channel construction shall follow the requirements


specified in the HCFCD Criteria Manual.

c. Design standards for outfalls into channels shall conform to those in the
HCFCD Criteria Manual.

2. Determination of Water Surface Elevation.

a. Water surface elevations shall be calculated using Manning's Equation and

9-13
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

the Continuity Equation.

b. For the Design Storm Event, the water surface shall be calculated to
remain within banks.

3. Design of Culverts.

a. Head losses in culverts shall conform to TxDOT Hydraulics Manual,


Chapter 4, Culverts.

b. Corrugated metal pipe will only be approved for railroad crossings.

F. Design of Roadside Ditches.

1. Design Frequency.

a. Roadside ditch design is permissible only for single family residential lots
or commercial areas equal to or larger than 0.5 acres.

b. The Design Storm Event for the roadside ditches shall be a minimum of 2-
year rainfall.

c. Design capacity for a roadside ditch shall be to a minimum of 0.5 feet


below the edge of pavement or 0.5 feet below the natural ground at right-
of-way line, whichever is lower.

d. The design must include an extreme event analysis to indicate that


structures will not be flooded, and maximum ponding elevation for the
extreme event complies with Paragraph 9.05.D.3.

2. Velocity Considerations.

a. For grass-lined sections, the maximum design velocity shall be 3.0 feet per
second during the design event.

b. A grass-lined or unimproved roadside ditch shall have side slopes no


steeper than three horizontal to one vertical (3:1), or as soil conditions will
permit.

c. Minimum grades for roadside ditches shall be 0.1-foot per 100 feet.

d. Calculation of velocity will use a Manning's roughness coefficient (n) of


0.045 for earthen sections and 0.025 for ditches with paved inverts.

e. Use erosion control methods acceptable to the City when design velocities

9-14
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

are expected to be greater than 3 feet per second.

3. Culverts.

a. Culverts will be placed at all driveway and roadway crossings, and other
locations where appropriate.

b. Culverts will be designed assuming inlet control.

c. Roadside culverts are to be sized based on drainage area. The minimum


culvert size shall be 24 inches unless the option for multiple smaller size
culverts is approved by the City Engineer. When requested, calculations
shall be provided for review. Culvert shall be placed to be a minimum of 4
inches and no more than 8 inches below the ditch flow line. Existing
roadside ditch on both sides of the proposed culvert shall be regraded for
positive drainage to the nearest intersection or up to 500 linear feet
whichever is smaller. In the ETJ, the Regulations for Harris, County,
Texas for the Construction of Driveways and/or Culverts on County
Easements and Rights-of-Way shall govern.

d. Cross open channels with roadside culverts no smaller than 24 inches


inside diameter or equivalent. The size of culvert used shall not create a
head loss of 0.20 feet greater than the normal water surface profile without
the culvert.

e. Stormwater discharging from a ditch into a storm sewer system must be


received by use of an appropriate structure (i.e., stubs with ring grates or
Type E inlets).

4. Invert Protection.

a. Ditch invert protection shall be used when velocities exceed 3 feet per
second.

b. Ditch invert protection will be used at the upstream and downstream ends
of all culverts.

5. Depth and Size Limitations.

a. Maximum depth shall not exceed 4 feet from adjacent edge of pavement.

b. Roadside ditch bottoms shall be at least 2 feet wide, unless design analysis
will support a narrower width.

c. Ditches in adjoining and parallel easements shall have top of bank not less

9-15
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

than 2 feet from the outside easement line.

G. Design of Outfalls: Outfall design shall conform to HCFCD Standards.

H. Stormwater Detention.

1. The intention of stormwater detention is to mitigate the effect of the New


Development, Redevelopment, or In-fill Development on an existing drainage
system. Stormwater detention volume is based on increased impervious cover and is
calculated at the minimum rates set forth in Paragraph 9.05.H.3.

2. Application of Detention.

a. The use of on-site detention is required for all Developments within the
City and for new or expanding utility districts within the City’s ETJ.
Detention will not required if the City has developed detention capacity
for a drainage watershed, and/or infrastructure improvements, to serve the
drainage watershed in compliance with the requirements of this Chapter.
Under these conditions, the City will consider a funding contribution in
lieu of on-site detention volume constructed by the owner.

b. If New Development, Redevelopment, or In-fill Development drains


directly into a channel maintained by HCFCD, then HCFCD criteria
prevails. If New Development, Redevelopment or In-fill Development
drains directly to a roadside ditch, drainage ditch or storm sewer
maintained by Harris County then the criteria in Regulations of Harris
County, Texas for the Approval and Acceptance of Infrastructure governs;
however, for all cases of multiple regulatory jurisdiction, Paragraph
9.02.G takes precedence.

c. If the drainage system outfalls directly into a channel maintained by


HCFCD, and the requirements of HCFCD include payment of an impact
fee, then no further impact fee will be required by the City.

d. If Redevelopment occurs without increasing the overall impervious


character of the site, then no detention will be required by the City.

e. A waiver of detention requirements may be requested if the following


conditions are satisfied:
(1) Development is located in an area determined by the City to not
need detention due to the geographic location in the watershed, the
Development’s proximity to regional facilities, or the capacity of
the receiving outfall facilities. Such conclusion by the City shall be
supported by submittal of a Hydraulic Report as described in
Paragraph 9.05.H.2.e(2).

9-16
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

(2) Hydraulic Report: Submit a hydraulic analysis prepared, signed,


and sealed by a professional engineer, registered in the state of
Texas, to demonstrate compliance with the conditions stated in this
Chapter. The hydraulic analysis shall consider (1) the current
developed condition of the watershed of the stormwater
conveyance system, and (2) the fully developed condition of the
watershed. The probable land use for the fully developed condition
will be determined by the design engineer for review and approval
by the City. The hydraulic analysis shall demonstrate no negative
impact to upstream or downstream conditions and shall
demonstrate that a positive impact will be achieved (reduced flood
crest due to the exemption.

3. Calculation of Detention Volume.

a. Detention volume for Development areas is calculated on the basis of the


amount of area of increased impervious cover. Impervious cover includes
all structures, driveways, patios, sidewalks, etc.

b. Single family residential (SFR) lots of 15,000 square feet in area or less:
SFR Lots are exempt from detention if proposed impervious cover is less
than or equal to 75.0 %. Detention volume of 0.20 acre feet per acre
required for impervious cover over 75%.

Existing SFR lots of 15,000 square feet or less may be further subdivided
and exempt from detention provided the proposed impervious cover
remains less than or equal to 75.0%

c.. Areas less than 1 acre: Detention will be required at a rate of 0.20 acre feet
per acre of increased impervious cover. The subdividing of larger tracts
into smaller tracts of 1.0 acre and less will require the detention volume of
0.5 acre-feet per acre of increased impervious cover.

d. Areas between 1 acre and 50 acres: Detention will be required at a rate of


0.50 acre-feet per acre of increased impervious cover.

e. Areas greater than 50 acres: Reference HCFCD Criteria Manual.

f. Private parking areas, private streets, and private storm sewers may be
used for detention provided the maximum depth of ponding does not
exceed 9 inches directly over the inlet, and paved parking areas are
provided with signage stating that the area is subject to flooding during
rainfall events.

g. Private transport truck only parking may be used for detention provided

9-17
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

the maximum depth of flooding does not exceed 15 inches directly above
the inlet and signage is provided stating that the area is subject to flooding
during rainfall events.

4. Calculation of Outlet Size.

a. Detention pond discharge pipe into an existing storm sewer line or existing
City of Houston ditch:

(1) Maximum pool elevation at or below the design hydraulic grade at the
drainage system outfall - The discharge line shall be sized for the
Design Storm with the discharge pipe flowing full. The pond will float
on the drainage system to provide maximum benefit.
(2) Maximum pool elevation at or above the hydraulic grade at the
drainage system outfall - Provide a reducer or restrictor pipe to be
constructed inside the discharge line. The discharge line shall be sized
for the Design Storm with the discharge pipe flowing full.

b. Reducer or Restrictor Pipes shall be sized as follows:

(1) Allowable Discharge Rate – Use the lowest of the discharge rates
described below:

(a) Restrictor pipes will provide a combination of low level and


high level controlled release from the detention basin. The low
level restrictor pipe (primary orifice) shall be sized to provide a
release rate of 0.5 CFS/acre when the detention basin water
depth reaches 25% of full basin depth. The low level restrictor
pipe (primary orifice) shall be located at the bottom of the
basin to provide complete drainage of the pond. The high level
restrictor pipe (secondary orifice) shall be sized to provide a
combined release rate (from the primary orifice and secondary
orifice) of 2.0 CFS/acre at full basin depth. The high level
restrictor (secondary orifice) shall begin releasing flow when
detention basin water depth reaches 75% of full basin depth.
The combined rate of 2.0 CFS/acre is the approximate
discharge from an undeveloped tract for the 100-year storm.
(b) Flow discharged to the storm drain shall not exceed the
proportional amount of pipe capacity allocated to the
Development. The proportional amount of pipe capacity
allocated to the Development shall be determined by the ratio
of the area (acres) of the Development (in storm drain
watershed) divided by the total drainage area (acres) of the
storm drain multiplied by the capacity of the storm drain.

9-18
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

(2) Use the following equations to calculate the required outflow orifice:
Q = CA
1/2 1/4
D = Q / (2.25 h )
Where:
Q = outflow discharge (cfs)
C = coefficient of discharge
= 0.8 for short segment of pipe
= 0.6 for opening in plates, standpipes, or
concrete walls
A = orifice area (square feet)
g = gravitational factor (32.2)
h = head, water surface differential (feet)
D = orifice diameter (feet)

(3) Restrictor shall be either of the required diameter or of the equivalent


cross-sectional area. The orifice diameter D shall be a minimum of 0.5
feet.

c. In addition to a pipe outlet, the detention basin shall be provided with a


gravity spillway that will protect structures from flooding should the detention
basin be overtopped.

5. Ownership and Easements.

a. Private Facilities:

(1) Pump discharges into a roadside ditch requires the submittal of pump
specifications on the design drawings.
(2) The City reserves the right to prohibit the use of pump discharges
where their use may aggravate flooding in the public right-of-way.
(3) Responsibility for maintenance of the detention facility must be
indicated by letter submitted to the City as part of the design review.
(4) All private properties being served have drainage access to the pond.
Dedicated easements may be required.
(5) No public properties drain into the detention area.
(6) A private maintenance agreement is provided when multiple tracts are
being served.

b. Public Facilities:

(1) Facilities will only be accepted for maintenance by the City within the
City limits in cases where public drainage is being provided.
(2) The City requires a maintenance work area of 30-foot width
surrounding the extent of the detention area. Public rights-of-way or

9-19
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

permanent access easements may be included as a portion of this 30-


foot width.
(3) A dedication of easement shall be provided by plat or by separate
instrument.
(4) Proper dedication of public access to the detention pond must be
shown on the plat or by separate instrument. This includes permanent
access easements with overlapping public utility easements.
(5) Backslope drainage systems are required where the natural ground slopes
towards the drainage basin. A basin that is within 30 feet of a parking lot
or roadway with berms that drain away from the basin does not require a
backslope swale. Comply with criteria provided in HCFCD Criteria
Manual.

9.06 EASEMENT AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY

A. Storm sewer easement and right-of-way requirements are described in Chapter 5 Easement
Requirements.

9.07 SUBMITTALS

A. Preliminary Submittals - Submittal, for review and comment, of one-line drawings is


recommended and may be required as part of the platting process. One-line drawings should
include:

1. Approximate definition of lots and street patterns.

2. The approximate drainage areas for each system.

3. A definition of the proposed drainage system by single line.

4. The proposed pipe diameters.

5. Any proposed drainage easements.

6. Floodplain information, including floodplain boundary, if any; FEMA map number,


effective map date and zone.

B. Final Design - Submit the following for approval:

1 Copies of any documents which show approval of exceptions to the City design
criteria.

2 Design calculations for time of concentration, storm line sizes and grades, and for
detention facilities, if any.

9-20
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

3. Design calculations for the Hydraulic Grade Line of each line or ditch, and for
detention facilities, if any.

4. Drainage Area Map with the following information:

a. Existing contour map.

b. Drainage area and sub-drainage area boundaries.

c. Drainage area (acres) and flow quantity (cfs) draining to each inlet and each
pipe segment from manhole to manhole.

d. Extreme event (100-year) Sheet Flow direction.

e. Existing condition and developed condition Sheet Flow direction for the
surrounding properties.

5. Plan and profile sheets showing stormwater design (public facilities only).

6. Projects located within a floodplain boundary or within a floodplain management area


shall:

a. Show the floodplain boundary or floodplain area, as appropriate, on the one-


line drawing or Drainage Area Map.

b. Comply with all applicable submittal requirements of Chapter 19, Code of


Ordinances.

7. Profile drawing of roadway (or overland flow path) with exaggerated vertical scale
from the upper reach of drainage area to the primary drainage outlet. Show roadway
profile at gutter, ground profile at the public right-of-way, and hydraulic gradient for
the 100-year extreme event; or an alternative equivalent drawing accepted by the
City.

8. Calculation for proportional amount of pipe capacity allocated to the Development


along with the drainage area map used for these calculations.

C. Signature Stage - Submit the following for approval:

1. Review prints

2. Original Drawings

3. Stormwater detention maintenance agreement letters.

9-21
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

4. Drainage Area Map with the following information:

a. Existing contour map.


b. Drainage area and sub-drainage area boundaries.

c. Drainage area (acres) and flow quantity (cfs) draining to each inlet and each
pipe segment from manhole to manhole.

d. Extreme event (100-year) Sheet Flow direction.

e. Existing condition and developed condition Sheet Flow direction for the
surrounding properties.

5. Profile drawing as specified in Paragraph 9.07.B.7.

9.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prepare calculations and design drawings under the supervision of a Professional Engineer
trained and licensed under the disciplines required by the project scope. The final design
drawings and all design calculations must be sealed, signed, and dated by the Professional
Engineer responsible for the development of the drawings.

9.09 DESIGN ANALYSIS

A. Projects shall be tied to National Geodetic Survey (NGS) datum adjustment which matches
the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) rate maps or the most current NGS
datum which matches the FEMA rate maps. In the event GPS surveying is used to establish
bench marks, at least two references to bench marks relating to the rate maps shall be
identified. Equations may be used to translate other datum adjustments to the required
adjustment.

B. Drawing sets shall include a Drainage Area Map, which will contain calculations of flow by
the rational method.

C. Drainage systems for curb-and-gutter pavements shall be underground closed Conduits;


individual residential lot drainage is exempt. Drainage systems for pavements without curb
and gutter shall be roadside open-ditch sections.

9.10 LOW IMPACT DEVELOPMENT

A. Design requirements for Low Impact Development techniques are included in Chapter 13.
Only three techniques may be considered to have impact on detention rates: Hard Roof,
Green Roof, and Porous Pavement.

9-22
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

END OF CHAPTER

9-23
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

9-24
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Stormwater Design Requirements

9-25
7-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 10

STREET PAVING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

Chapter 10

STREET PAVING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

10.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Geometric design guidelines for streets, criteria for street paving, and standard paving notes
for drawings.

10.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to the list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements.

B. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

D. ITE – Institute of Transportation Engineers

E. TMUTCD – Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Texas Department of


Transportation.

F. IBC - International Building Code

G. MTFP - Major Thoroughfare Plan

10.03 DEFINITIONS

A. CMP – City Mobility Plan

B. Curb-and-gutter Sections - Full width concrete pavement with doweled on 6-inch curbs or
monolithic curb-and-gutter sections for asphaltic concrete pavement. Curb-and-gutter
sections require inlets and underground storm sewers.

C. Geotechnical Engineer – A licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas who is


practicing in the field of geotechnical engineering. Assignment of geotechnical or material
testing by a geotechnical engineer shall be performed by a laboratory accredited by the
American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA).

D. HMAC - Hot-mix asphaltic concrete

E. Intersection Sight Distance – Provides an unobstructed line of sight in each direction at


intersections. The unobstructed line of sight allows for vehicles on side streets to observe
approaching traffic on the main roadway and to safely enter an intersection from a side street.

10-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

The unobstructed line of sight allows for vehicles on the main roadway sufficient distance to
observe vehicles entering from side streets.

F. Local Streets – Provide access to individual single-family residential lots, provide entry and
exit to the neighborhood, and provide connectivity to collectors and thoroughfares.

G. Roadside Ditch Sections - Ditch sections adjacent to either full width reinforced concrete
pavement or asphaltic concrete pavement. Roadside ditch sections do not require
underground storm sewers; however, the ditch sections must be designed to accommodate
storm runoff.

H. Type 1 Permanent Access Easement - A permanent access easement at least 50 feet in width
that is designed and constructed like a public street in accordance with the design manual and
contains one or more public utilities in an unpaved portion of the easement. Refer to Chapter
42 of the Code of Ordinances No. 1999-262.

I. Type 2 Permanent Access Easement - A permanent access easement at least 28 feet in width
that is designed and constructed like a private street serving a development that has no public
utilities other than a public water line connected only to one or more fire hydrants that
provides no domestic water services. All private utilities within a Type 2 permanent access
easement must be designed to public utility standards outlined in the Infrastructure Design
Manual. Refer to Chapter 42 of the Code of Ordinances No. 1999-262.

10.04 HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE (HMAC) PAVEMENT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

A. HMAC Surface Minimum Thickness – Pavement design shall be prepared by a Professional


Engineer based on current AASHTO design methodology (Guide for the Design of Pavement
Structure). Minimum thickness shall be as shown on Standard Detail 02741-01.

B. Flexible Base Minimum Thickness – Pavement design shall be prepared by a Professional


Engineer based on current AASHTO design methodology (Guide for the Design of Pavement
Structure). Minimum thickness shall be as shown on Standard Detail 02741-01.

C. Subgrade Treatment

1. Subgrade stabilization, stabilization design, and method of stabilization shall be


determined by a geotechnical engineer.

2. For subgrade conditions of cohesive soils, subgrade treatment or stabilization shall be


no less than 6 inches unless otherwise permitted in this document or specified by a
geotechnical engineer.

10-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10.05 CONCRETE PAVEMENT DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

The following requirements are applicable to pavement within City street rights-of-way.

A. Minimum Pavement Thickness, Reinforcing, and Subgrade Stabilization Requirements:

1. Pavement thickness and reinforcement shall be designed by a Professional Engineer


based on a current soils analysis, roadway use, traffic loadings, and life span of
proposed pavement. Pavement design shall be prepared by a Professional Engineer
based on current AASHTO design methodology (Guide for the Design of Pavement
Structure). However, in no event shall the pavement thickness be less than the
minimums stated below.

2. For Concrete Pavement Widths Less Than or Equal to 27 Feet Face-to-Face of Curb:

a. Minimum concrete slab thickness shall be 6 inches.

b. Minimum concrete strength shall be f’c = 3500 psi.

c. Minimum reinforcing steel strength shall be fy = 60,000 psi.

d. Refer to City of Houston Standard Detail 02751-01 for concrete reinforcement


details.

e. Minimum stabilized subgrade thickness shall be 6 inches.

f. The type and depth of subgrade shall be as determined by a geotechnical engineer.

3. For Concrete Pavement Widths Greater Than 27 Feet Face-to-Face of Curb and Not
Major Thoroughfares:

a. Minimum concrete slab thickness shall be 7 inches.

b. Minimum concrete strength shall be f’c = 3500 psi.

c. Minimum reinforcing steel strength shall be fy = 60,000 psi.

d. Refer to City of Houston Standard Detail 02751-01 for concrete reinforcement


details.

e. Minimum stabilized subgrade thickness shall be 6 inches.

f. The type and depth of subgrade shall be as determined by a geotechnical engineer.

4. For Major Thoroughfares Constructed With Concrete Pavement:


10-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

a. Minimum concrete slab thickness shall be 8 inches.

b. Minimum concrete strength shall be f’c = 3500 psi.

c. Minimum reinforcing steel strength shall be fy=60,000 psi.

d. Refer to City of Houston Standard Detail 02751-01 for concrete reinforcement


details.

e. Minimum stabilized subgrade thickness shall be 8 inches.

f. The type and depth of subgrade shall be as determined by a geotechnical engineer.

5. Paving headers shall be placed at the end of all concrete pavements..

B. Curb Requirements:

1. 6 inch Vertical Curb:

a. 6 inch curb is the standard curb design.

b. Collector streets and streets allowing cut-through traffic in residential areas


require construction of 6 inch vertical curb.

2. Laydown Curb:

a. Laydown curb shall be in accordance with City Standard Details.

b. Shall be 4 inches in height.

c. Is only allowed as an option for street projects on single family residential streets
within the City.

d. Laydown curb shall not be permitted if sidewalk is to be constructed immediately


adjacent to the curb.

e. Laydown curb construction shall provide for necessary transition lengths at curb
inlets to go from laydown curb to standard vertical curb section.

f. Standard 6 inch vertical curb shall be extended a minimum of 10 feet beyond curb
sections before beginning transitions.

10.06 GEOMETRIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

A. Roadway Cross Sections:


10-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

1. The City of Houston utilizes the basic roadway cross sections shown in City of
Houston Standard Drawing Nos. 10.06-01, 02 and 03, respectively. ALL variations
to these three standards require the approval of the City Engineer.

2. Street Hierarchy:

a. The City’s street hierarchy is described in the Major Thoroughfare and Freeway
Plan (MTFP).

b. MTFP street classifications are:


(1) Principal Thoroughfare
(2) Thoroughfare
(3) Major Collector
(4) Transit Corridor

c. Where existing conditions or proposed adjacent development warrant the


consideration of alternatives to serve specific needs such as enhanced pedestrian
environments, on-street parking, and bicycle traffic, optional design sections are
available in the CMP. Examples of these optional design sections are shown in
Appendix 2 of this chapter.

3. Local Street Classifications (not applicable in ETJ)

a. Local street classification are:


(1) Residential Standard Density – Provides access to individual lots equal to or
greater than 40 feet in width.
(2) Residential High Density – Provides access to individual lots less than 40 feet
in width.
(3) Residential Main – Serves multiple streets and can be described as the
“neighborhood feeder/collector.”
(4) A summary of the design characteristics for the three local street
classifications above is included in Table 1 below. Traffic volumes shown in
column “Traffic ADT” are provided as general guidelines.

10-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

TABLE 10.1
LOCAL STREET CLASSIFICATION

Gross Min. Traffic


Street Density Traffic Pav’t Flow
Classification DU/ac(5) ADT (1) Width(ft) Cond.(2)
Residential Std (3) 0-6 250-350 27 Yield
Residential HD (4) 6-27 350-750 32 Slow
Residential Main 0-27 >1500 36 Free

Notes
1. ADT – average daily traffic.
2. Based on parallel on-street parking two sides.
3. Lot widths equal to or greater than 40 feet.
4. Lot widths less than 40 feet.
5. DU/AC – dwelling units (DU) per acre.

b. Design Considerations:
(1) Factors that affect the number of trips per residence include:
(a) Number of dwelling units per acre (density).
(b) Location of services within or near the neighborhood.
(c) Pedestrian and bicycle facilities within the neighborhood.
(d) Connectivity to the collector and thoroughfare network, and other
factors.
(2) Traffic volume guidelines (ADT) are based on full development density.
(3) Refer to the ITE Trip Generation Information Report for further discussion of
single family residential trip generation rates.

c. Design Example:

Table 2 summarizes design information for developments of various size with a


density of 6 dwelling units (DU) per acre. This example is based on long block
length of 700’ (centerline to centerline of street), short block length of 260’,
typical lot size of 50’ wide by 100’ long, and street rights-of-way of 60’. For this
example, gross acreage per block is 4.18 acres (700’x 260’), net acreage of lots is
2.94 acres (640’x 200’), number of lots per block is 25 (640/50 x 2), and gross
density is 6 DU/ac (25 lots/4.18 ac) Estimates of ADT are based on a trip
generation rate of 10 trips/DU/day.

10-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

TABLE 10.2
DESIGN EXAMPLE
Estim Estim.
Gross ADT ADT
Size Density No. No. Resid. Entry/Exit
(acres) DU/ac Lots Entrances Street Street(1)
25 6.0 150 1 250 1500 (2)
25 6.0 150 2 250 750 (3)
75 6.0 450 3 250 1500 (4)
75 6.0 450 4 250 1125 (5)

Notes
1. Based on even distribution of traffic per entry/exit.
2. Residential Main (150 lots x 10 trips/DU/d = 1500 ADT)
3. Residential Standard Density (150 lots x 10 trips/DU/d / 2 entrances = 750 ADT)
4. Residential Main (450 lots x 10 trips/DU/d /3entrances = 1500 ADT)
5. Residential Standard Density (450 lots x 10 trips/DU/d /4 entrances = 1125 ADT)

B. Horizontal Geometric Requirements:

1. Curb Radii:

a. Cul-de-Sac Curb Radii:


(1) For approved cul-de-sac curb radii, refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing
No. 10.06-09.
(2) Curb radii around cul-de-sacs shall be 42-feet for single family areas.
(3) Curb radii around cul-de-sacs shall be 50 feet for cul-de-sacs in areas other
than single family areas.

b. Street Intersection Curb Radii:


(1) For approved street intersection curb radii, refer to City of Houston Standard
Drawing No. 10.06-04.
(2) Variances to the standard presented in City of Houston Standard Drawing No.
10.06-04 require approval by the City Engineer.
(3) Street intersection curb radii are a composite of needs to serve pedestrian and
vehicular traffic.

2. Right-of-Way Corner Cut-Backs:

a. For approved right-of-way corner cut-back dimensions, refer to City of Houston


Standard Drawing No. 10.06-04.

b. Right-of-way shall be dedicated for corner cut-backs on principal thoroughfares,


thoroughfares, transit corridor streets, major collectors, collectors and local streets

10-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

as a requirement for subdivision platting of adjacent properties under Chapter 42


of the City of Houston Code of Ordinances.

c. When right-of-way corner cut-backs are not feasible on local streets, cut-back
easements will be required.

d. For Type 1 Permanent Access Easements, cut-back easements shall be provided.

e. Corner cut-backs of right-of-way at street intersections are necessary to provide


sufficient public space for pedestrian sidewalk facilities and ramps (compliant
with Americans with Disabilities Act – ADA and Texas Accessibility Standards-
TAS), traffic control devices, street signs, street lighting, traffic signal equipment,
and all surface encroachments which could prevent the future installation of such
equipment within the cut-back area.

3. Intersection Sight Distance:

a. Dedicated right-of-way or easements are required to meet the intersection sight


distance triangle requirements.
b. Design Basis
(1) Design Vehicle – Passenger Car
(2) Design Standard – AASHTO “A Policy on Geometric Design of Highway and
Streets”
(3) Lane Widths – 12 foot wide travel lanes
(4) Level Road Surface
(5) Drive’s Eye – 25 foot distance from curb line of main roadway.
(6) Sight Distance – Is measured to the center of the outside lane on main
roadway approaching from the left and to the center of the inside lane of
traffic on the main roadway approaching from the right.

c. Design Procedures:
(1) Determine design speed of main roadway. Refer to Figure 1 of Appendix 2
for design speeds of street classifications in the MTFP and CMP.
(2) For the appropriate design speed, determine the minimum sight distance from
the following Table 10.3:

TABLE 10.3
REQUIRED INTERSECTION SIGHT DISTANCE
Design Speed (mph) Sight Distance (feet)*
35 360
45 540
* Based upon AASHTO intersection sight distance criteria

10-8
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

(3) Develop a scaled drawing depicting the sight triangle based on the design
criteria. Refer to the City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-05.

d. Exceptions

Replats and partial replats at the intersections of a local/local street, local/major


collector street, and major collector/major collector street are exempt from
providing intersection sight distance rights-of-way or easements where existing
site conditions for abutting properties preclude compliance.

4. Median Design:

a. Minimum Median Width:


(1) For local streets, refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-02.
(2) For street classifications depicted on the MTFP, refer to City of Houston
Standard Drawing No. 10.06-02.
(3) For streets classified as multi-modal under the CMP, please refer to Appendix
2 of Chapter 10.

b. Minimum Median Length:

(1) Median lengths are based on functional street classification of the main
roadway and intersecting street.
(2) Refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-06 for minimum
median length requirements.

c. Median Geometry – Refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-07

d. Street Taper Geometry – Refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-
08 for subdivision street taper geometrics.

5. Left Turn Lanes:

a. Left Turn Lanes are Required:


(1) At all signalized intersection approaches on principal thoroughfares and
thoroughfares.
(2) At all signalized intersection approaches on major collectors and collectors as
directed by the City Engineer.

b. Left Turn Lane Design Standards:


(1) Refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-07 for left turn bay
geometrics.
(2) The centerline of left turn lanes shall not be offset greater than three feet
horizontally across the intersection, and the offset for through vehicles in all
lanes shall not exceed three feet horizontally across the intersection.
10-9
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

(3) The volume of left turn movements shall be based on projections developed in
the City Mobility Plan or based on traffic studies reviewed and approved by
the City Engineer.

c. Dual Left Turn Lanes:


(1) Are required when left turn movement exceeds 300 vehicles for the peak hour,
or when traffic analysis of the intersection indicates existing or projected left
turn storage space requires dual left turn lanes before the volume threshold is
reached.

(2) Where dual left turn lanes are required, right of way for the intersection shall
be based on the width required for dual left turns, through lanes, a right turn
lane, and minimum landscape/pedestrian zone of ten feet (dimension S) as
shown in City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-02.

d. Special conditions or other constraints may require design criteria other than
shown herein.
(1) Exceptions to the requirements must be demonstrated by submittal of a traffic
study encompassing AASHTO criteria.
(2) Approval by City Engineer is required for all variances to standard.

C. Vertical Geometric Requirements:

1. For Curb and Gutter Pavement Sections:

a. Minimum grade line shall be 0.30 percent.

b. Minimum grade line shall be 1 percent for radii of 35 feet or less around
intersection turnouts. Grades for larger radii shall be determined on an individual
basis.

c. Superelevation – Major thoroughfares shall be superelevated in accordance with


AASHTO requirements.

d. Vertical Curves:
(1) Shall be installed when the algebraic difference in grades exceeds 1 percent.
(2) Elevations shall be shown at 10-foot intervals through vertical curves.
(3) Maintain a minimum of 0.03-foot elevation change at 10-foot intervals by
altering calculated elevations.
(4) Determine minimum vertical curve lengths based on AASHTO design criteria
(minimum 3 times design speed) using a minimum design speed of 45 miles
per hour for thoroughfares and collector streets and 35 mph for residential
streets.

e. Minimum grade line around a cul-de-sac shall be 0.70 percent.


10-10
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

f. Pavement Cross Slopes:


(1) Cross slopes for pavement shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot.
(2) Cross slopes for left-turn lanes and esplanade openings shall be 1/8 inch per
foot minimum.

2. Railroad Crossings

a. Maximum Tangent Grade to Vertical Curves At Railroad Crossings:


(1) 8 percent for local streets
(2) 3.5 percent for major thoroughfares

b. Roadway grades at railroad crossings shall be zero percent from centerline of the
track to 10 feet either side of the track’s centerline, and should not cause a drop of
more than 6 inches from the top-of-rail elevation at a distance of 30 feet either
side of the track’s centerline.

c. For concrete roadways, the roadway shall terminate at a railroad header, 6 feet
from the centerline of the track and the roadway cross slope shall be zero from the
railroad header to 4 feet before the railroad header.

d. At railroad track approaches, decrease curbs from 6 inches to zero inches in 2 feet
at a distance of 10 feet from the nearest track centerline.

D. Sidewalks and Accessibility Ramps:

1. Accessibility ramps shall be constructed at all intersections.

2. Ramps, approaches and sidewalks shall be comply with ADA and TAS requirements.

3. Approved sidewalk/ramp details are shown in the City’s Standard Details. Use of
these details are specific to certain field conditions such as ramp direction, driveway
crossings, crosswalk locations and the location of the sidewalk with respect to the
curb.

4. Where use of standard sidewalk/ramp details is not possible due to field conditions,
engineer shall submit proposed design drawings to City Engineer for approval.
Design drawings shall include site field survey conditions.

5. Accessibility ramps should cross street at 90 degrees to centerline of street.

6. All ramps constructed on an intersection corner should be interconnected for


pedestrian access continuity.

10-11
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

7. Mid-block crosswalks are not permitted without approval by City Engineer. The
specific conditions which warrant a mid-block crosswalk must be provided to support
the request for a design variance.

8. Sidewalks at intersections are to be provided with unobstructed areas as shown in


Standard Drawing No. 10.06-04 and are to be free of obstructions and surface
encroachments such as sign posts, power poles and down guy wires within that area.

9. Concrete Sidewalk in Esplanades:

a. 6 inch thick reinforced concrete sidewalk shall be constructed in esplanades when


curbs are 10 feet face to face of curb or less in width with a minimum length of 6
feet measured from the face of curb of the esplanade nose.

b. Reinforced concrete sidewalk in esplanades shall be colored black for concrete


roadways.

c. Reinforced concrete sidewalk in esplanades shall be uncolored for asphaltic


concrete roadways.

10. Sidewalks for Transit Corridor Street and Type A Streets:

a. Chapter 42, Article IV - Transit Corridor Development, of the Code of


Ordinances regulates improvements constructed in the public right of way within
1,320 feet of each transit station (Ch. 42, Sec 401-406).

b. Mandatory requirements are summarized below and shown in Standard Detail


02775-08. These requirements are required under IBC, Section 3110).
(1) Minimum Sidewalk Width – 6 feet (must be located within the public right of
way).
(2) Minimum Vertical Clear Zone, a continuous obstacle free path, for a
minimum width of six feet and a minimum height of seven and one-half feet.

c. Performance Standards – Refer to Chapter 42 Sections 401-406:


(1) Minimum Pedestrian Realm – 15 feet distance from back of curb to a
buildings facade or other improvements (can be entirely within public right of
way or a combination of public right of way and public access easement).
(2) Maximum Softscape area in the pedestrian realm is 20% of the surface area of
the pedestrian realm excluding any driveways and shall be located at least two
feet from the back-of-curb of any street area used for parking.

E. Alleys:

1. Design standards for a Public Use Alley are shown in City of Houston Standard
Drawing No. 10.06-10.
10-12
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

2. An offer of dedication of right of way to the public is required for a Public Use Alley
and such offer must be formally accepted by the City for implementation of public
maintenance services.

3. A log of all public use alleys is maintained by PWE on the GIM’s website.

4. The minimum design standards for a Private Use Alley are shown in City of Houston
Standard Drawing No. 10.06-11.

5. The right of way for a Private Use Alley is owned and maintained by the abutting
property owners.

6. Signs shall be erected by the developer at the entrance to the alley (or by the abutting
property owners for existing alleys) which state “PRIVATE ALLEY – NOT A
PUBLIC WAY”. See City of Houston Standard Drawing 10.06-11 for sign details.

F. Street Terminations:

1. Where cul-de-sac streets are approved, design geometrics shall comply with City of
Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-09.

2. Where termination of a private street or Type 2 Permanent Access Easement is


approved, design geometrics shall comply with City of Houston Standard Drawing
No. 10.06-09.

3. Dead-End Streets – Standard City of Houston barricades shall be placed at the end of
dead-end streets not terminating in cul-de-sacs. Refer to City of Houston Standard
Detail No. 01580-01.

4. Temporary Street Termination:

a. Temporary termination of streets (for future extension into adjacent development)


shall include construction of street barricades as shown in City of Houston
Standard Detail No. 01580-01.

b. A sign shall be mounted on the street barricade with the statement: “STREET IS
A THROUGH STREET AND WILL BE EXTENDED AT A FUTURE DATE.”

10.07 STREET CONNECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS:

A. Street Transition Requirements:

1. For Concrete Streets:

10-13
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

a. When transitioning from a proposed concrete street to an existing concrete street,


the transition shall consist of concrete, and shall equal the existing concrete
pavement thickness with a minimum thickness of 6 inches.

b. Refer to City of Houston Standard Detail 02751-01.

2. For Streets Other Than Concrete Pavement:

a. When transitioning from a proposed street to an existing street constructed of


something other than concrete, the transition shall consist of flexible base paving.

b. Refer to City of Houston Standard Drawing No. 10.06-03.

B. Proposed Curb and Gutter Street Connecting to an Existing Roadside Ditch Street:

1. The standard transition length for meeting a roadside ditch street is:

a. 50 feet for street widths less than or equal to 27 feet face to face of curb.

b. 75 feet for street widths equal to 36 feet face to face of curb.

c. 100 feet for street widths equal to 40 feet face to face of curb.

C. Proposed Curb and Gutter Street Connecting to an Existing Curb and Gutter Street:

1. When meeting an existing curb-and-gutter street, top-of-curb elevations shall be


designed to meet an elevation 6 inches above the existing gutter.

2. At existing inlets, top-of-curb elevations shall be designed to match existing top-of-


curb elevations.

D. Construction Requirements for Connecting a Proposed Concrete Street with an Existing


Concrete Street:

1. When meeting existing concrete streets at right angles, the existing street should be
saw cut in a V-shape extending from the curb returns to a point where the centerline
of the proposed pavement intersects the quarter point of the existing concrete street to
create a crowned intersection. In the event this construction creates a situation in
which traffic on the existing street, at design speed, will bottom out when crossing the
proposed street intersection, a special design will be allowed to eliminate this
potentially dangerous condition.

2. Concrete to be removed shall be removed either to an existing joint or a sawed joint.


The groove of the sawed joint shall be cut to a minimum depth of 2 inches along the
line designated by the Professional Engineer.
10-14
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

3. When meeting existing concrete pavement, horizontal dowels shall be used if no


exposed reinforcing steel exists. Horizontal dowels shall be Grade 60 bars, 24 inches
long, drilled and embedded 12 inches into the center of the existing slab with PO
ROC, or approved equal. Dowels shall be 12 inches center-to-center, unless otherwise
specified.

4. When concrete is removed for connection with proposed concrete pavement, the
pavement shall be saw cut and existing concrete removed to expose a minimum of 15
inches of reinforcing steel. If no reinforcing steel exists, use horizontal dowels per
Paragraph 10.07 D.3.

E. Pavement Connection Special Requirements:

1. At a T-intersection with a street that has not been improved to its ultimate width,
concrete shall be stopped either at the right-of-way line or the end of the curb return.
The option that will require the least concrete removal at a future date should be
chosen.

2. For roadway turnouts placed at an existing cross street intersection, the turnout should
be designed to fit the ultimate pavement width of the intersecting cross street and then
transitioned to the existing roadway.

F. L – Type Street
The minimum grade line around the longest radius on an L-type street shall be 0.40 percent.

10.08 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Pavement Crossing Pipelines – A Letter of agreement between the City and pipeline
company is required when paving is placed over a transmission pipeline.

B. Thoroughfare Construction Considerations:

1. When the full section of a thoroughfare is located within the city limits and is
dedicated on a final plat, the esplanade and all lanes of the thoroughfare shall be
constructed at the time of initial construction of the roadway.

2. If approved by the City Engineer, lanes contained within a plat, left-turn lanes and the
esplanade to the centerline of the right-of-way shall be constructed at the time of
initial construction of the roadway when only one side of a thoroughfare is located on
a final plat. The remaining lanes, left-turn lanes and esplanade shall be constructed at
the time the final plat containing the opposite side of the thoroughfare is approved.

C. Inlets and Manholes


1. The inlet spacing and the maximum allowable curb run to an inlet shall be provided
in accordance with Ch 9.
10-15
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

2. City approved inlets shall be used on all curbs and gutter sections within the city
limits and in the ETJ.

3. Keep proposed inlets away from esplanade opening and out of major thoroughfare
intersections. For intersections between a major thoroughfare and minor street, locate
inlets at the end of return (E/R) of the side street.

4. Inlets shall be placed at the end of pavement in order to eliminate drainage from the
pavement gutter into a road ditch.

5. when curb and gutter streets connects to roadside ditches street, place inlets at end of
curb and gutter street with reinforced concrete pipe stubs with rings to collect ditch
storm water. See standard detail 02632-11- Side Street Ditch Reception

6. Use only City standard cast iron grates for curb inlets.

7. Adjust existing manhole frames and covers within the limits of the proposed
pavement to meet the proposed top-of-slab elevation.

8. Adjust existing manhole frames and covers outside the limits of pavement to conform
to the final grading plan.

D. When a curb and gutter street intersects a drainage ditch, the gutter elevation shall be above
the designed water surface elevation of the ditch.

E. Fill/Cut For Proposed Pavement:

a. Fill Placement For Curb and Gutter Pavement Sections:


(1) Fill shall be placed to ensure a minimum of 3/8 inches per foot transverse
slope toward the curb from the property line. Fill shall be placed between the
curb and a point 2 feet outside of the right-of-way.
(2) Where fill as described above is required, and the pavement is adjacent to a
nonparticipating property owner, fill easements shall be obtained, filed, and a
copy of the easement shall accompany the final drawings.
(3) Construction of this nature will require back-slope drainage design to prevent
trapping storm runoff.

b. When pavement or curb grades are established below natural ground, slope lines
shall be shown on the drawings.

F. Drawings

1. Construction drawings shall be prepared in accordance with Chapter 3, Graphic


Requirements.

10-16
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

2. Top-of-curb grade for the outside lanes shall be labeled except at railroad crossings
where gutter grades shall be labeled. Centerline grades are acceptable for sheets with
roadside ditch sections.

3. For proposed driveways, call out centerline stations, widths, and radii.

END OF CHAPTER

10-17
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-19
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-20
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-21
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-22
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-23
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-24
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-25
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-26
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-27
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-28
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

10-29
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

APPENDIX 2

CHAPTER 10

Appendix 2 presents a “Street Design Menu” with examples of optional roadway corridor
sections that are a result of the 2009 City of Houston Mobility Planning Study. Figure 1 is
provided to cross reference the street classifications in the Major Thoroughfare and Freeway
Plan to the corridor sections within the City Mobility Plan. These corridor sections can be
utilized for development of roadway systems within the City limit of Houston. These roadway
sections are not applicable in the ETJ of the City. The tables identify the right-of-way
requirements and element dimensions associated with each corridor section.

Each roadway corridor section is permissible under the Infrastructure Design Manual but
requires the specific approval of the City Engineer prior to construction. While full right-of-way
dedication may not be required under Chapter 42 of the City of Houston Code of Ordinances, it
is expected that developer’s utilizing these alternative sections will make available the necessary
public right-of-way dimensions at no cost to the City of Houston.

NOTES
1. Sidewalk dimensions shown are options. Minimum sidewalk dimension for Transit
Street designations is six (6) feet and five (5) feet for all others.

2. TW – Tree Wells will be considered for use in lieu of a green space dimension where
shown in Tables.

10-30
07-01-2009
CITY MOBILITY PLAN (CMP) MAJOR THOROUGHFARE AND FREEWAY PLAN (MTFP)
MULTI MODAL CLASSIFICATION EXISTING CLASSIFICATION

Avg Daily Traffic Vol (vpd)


PRINCIPAL MAJOR LOCAL

Design Speed (mph)


THOROUGHFARE THOROUGHFARE COLLECTOR COLLECTOR STREET
>5 miles >3 miles 1 - 2 miles 1 - 2 miles <1 mile

Number of Lanes
Proposed ROW
>30,000 vpd >20,000 vpd >5,000 vpd >5,000 vpd <5,000 vpd
Design Speed Design Speed Design Speed Design Speed Design Speed
45 mph 45 mph 45 mph 45 mph 35 mph

Ex ROW: 60' - 400' Ex ROW: 50' - 210' Ex ROW: 50' - 150' Ex ROW: 50' - 150' Min 50'
BOULEVARD
Urban 100'-140' 4-8 15,000-50,000 45
Suburban 100'-120' 2-6 500-50,000 45
Transit 120' 4-6 1,500-30,000 45
Industrial 100'-120' 4-6 15,000-50,000 45

AVENUE
Urban 80'-100' 2-4 1,500-30,000 45
Suburban 80'-100' 2-4 1,000-20,000 45
Transit 100’ 2 1,500-15,000 45
Industrial 80'-100' 3-5 5,000-35,000 45

COUPLET 60'-100' 2-5 1,000-25,000 45

STREET
Urban 60' 2 1,000-10,000 35
Suburban 60' 2 500-5,000 35

LOCAL STREET
Residential Main 60'-70' 2 ≥1,500 35
Residential High Density 55'-60' 2 350-750 35
Residential Std Density 50'-65' 1+ 250-350 35

Indicates Shared Classification

Figure 1
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

URBAN BOULEVARD DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk Tree Well or On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths
ADT (vpd)
(feet) (feet) Swale (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
16 x 2 = 32 TW N/A N/A 20 4 x 12 = 48
100 18 x 2 = 36 TW N/A N/A 16 4 x 12 = 48 15,000-30,000
12 x 2 = 24 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12 16 4 x 12 = 48

16 x 2 = 32 TW N/A N/A 16 6 x 12 = 72
120 12 x 2 = 24 TW N/A N/A 24 6 x 12 = 72 15,000-40,000
10 x 2 = 20 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12 16 6 x 12 = 72

140 10 x 2 = 20 TW N/A N/A 24 8 x 12 = 96 20,000-50,000

10-32
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

SUBURBAN BOULEVARD DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Tree Landscape
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths
or Swale ADT (vpd)
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
(feet)
10 x 2 = 20 14 x 2 = 28 8 X 2 = 16 N/A 12 2 x 12 = 24 500-5,000
100 5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A 20 4 x 12 = 48
20,000-35,000
16 x 2 = 32 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A 20 4 x 12 = 48

10* x 2 = 20 8 x 2 = 16 N/A 5 x 2 = 10 18 4 x 12 = 48 1,500-15,000


120 5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A 16 6 x 12 = 72
20,000-50,000
14 x 2 = 28 6 x 2 = 12 N/A N/A 20 6 x 12 = 72

* Multi-Use Path along Center of Median, No abutting sidewalks


10-33
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

TRANSIT BOULEVARD DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Tree Well or
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths
Swale ADT (vpd)
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
(feet)
110 17 x 2 = 34 TW N/A N/A
28 4 x 12 = 48 15,000--30,000
120 16 x 2 = 32 TW N/A 6 x 2 =12

120 15 x 2 = 30 TW N/A N/A 16 4 x 12, + 2 x


15.5 x 2 = 31 13 = 74 15,000-30,000
125 TW N/A N/A 20
4 x 12, 2 X 13

10-34
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

INDUSTRIAL BOULEVARD DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk Tree Landscape On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths ADT (vpd)
(feet) (feet) or Swale (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet)
(feet)
4 x 12, + 2 x 13
120 5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A 16 20,000--50,000
= 74
2 x 12, + 2 x 13
100 5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A 20 15,000--40,000
= 50

10-35
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

URBAN AVENUE DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Tree Well or
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths ADT
Swale
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (vpd)
(feet)
20 x 2 = 40 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A
10 x 2 = 20 TW 18 x 2 = 36 * N/A N/A
15 x 2 = 30 TW 8 x 2 = 16 5 x 2 = 10 N/A 2 x 12 = 24 1,500-15,000
10 x 2 = 20 TW 18 x 2 = 36 * N/A N/A
22 x 2 = 44 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A
21 x 2 = 42 TW N/A N/A N/A
80 2 x12 +
13 x 2 = 26 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A
1 x14 (CLTL*)* 5,000-20,000
8 x 2 = 16 TW 8 x 2 = 16 5 x 2 = 10 N/A
= 38
15 x 2 = 30 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A
16 x 2 = 32 TW N/A N/A N/A
8 x 2 = 16 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A 4 x 12 = 48 10,000-30,000
10 x 2 = 20 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A

13 x 2 = 26 TW 8 x 2 = 16 5 x 2 = 10 N/A 4 x 12 = 48
100 10,000-30,000
20 x 2 = 40 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A 4 x 12 = 48
* Angle Parking

10-36
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

SUBURBAN AVENUE DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
LandscapeTree or
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths ADT
Swale
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (vpd)
(feet)
10 x 2 = 20 10 x 2 = 20 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A
8 x 2 = 16 7 x 2 = 14 8 x 2 = 16 5 x 2 = 10 N/A 2 x 12 = 24 1,000-10,000
12 x 2 = 24 10 x 2 = 20 N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A
80
10 x 2 = 20 6 x 2 = 12 N/A N/A N/A
18 x 2 = 36 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A N/A 4 x 12 = 48 5,000-20,000
5 x 2 = 10 4x2=8 N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A

5 x 2 = 10 12 x 2 = 24 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A
100 4 x 12 = 48 5,000-20,000
5 x 2 = 10 14 x 2 = 28 N/A 6 x 2 = 12 N/A

10-37
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

TRANSIT AVENUE DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk Tree Well or On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths ADT
(feet) (feet) Swale (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (vpd)
(feet)
100 18 x 2 = 36 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12
28 2 x 12 = 24 1,500-15,000
100 16 x 2 = 32 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A

10-38
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

INDUSTRIAL AVENUE DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk Tree Landscape On-Street Parking Bike Lane Median Width Lane Widths ADT
(feet) (feet) or Swale (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (vpd)
(feet)
2 x 12, + 2 x
5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A N/A 13 10,000-,25,000
80 = 50
2 x 13, + 1x 14
5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A N/A 5,000-15,000
= 50

2 x 13 + 1x 14
90 5 x 2 = 10 15 x 2 = 30 N/A N/A N/A 5,000-15,000
= 50

4 x 13 +, 1 x 14
100 5 x 2 = 10 12 x 2 = 24 N/A N/A N/A 10,000-35,000
= 66

10-39
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

COUPLET DESIGNATION
PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Street Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk Tree Well or On-Street Parking Bike Median Lane Widths ADT
Type (feet) (feet) Swale (feet) Lane Width (feet) (vpd)
(feet) (feet) (feet)
2 Lane 60 20 x 2 = 40 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A
2 x 12 = 24 1,000-10,000
Couplet 18 20 x 2 = 40 TW N/A N/A N/A

3 Lane 14 x 2 = 28 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A


80 3 x 12 = 36 1,500-15,000
Couple 22 x 2 = 44 TW N/A N/A N/A

4 Lane 8 x 2 = 16 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A


80 4 x 12 = 48 5,000-20,000
Couplet 16 x 2 = 32 TW N/A N/A N/A

5 Lane 80 10 x 2 = 20 TW N/A N/A N/A


5 x 12 = 60 10,000-25,000
Couplet 100 12 x 2 = 24 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A N/A

10-40
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

URBAN STREET DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk Tree Well or Swale On-Street Parking Bike Lane Lane Widths ADT
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (vpd)
18 x 2 = 36 TW N/A N/A
10 x 2 = 20 TW 8 x 2 = 16 N/A
60 2 x 12 = 24 1,000 – 10,000
12 x 2 = 24 TW N/A N/A
12 x 2 = 24 TW N/A 6 x 2 = 12

10-41
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Paving Design Requirements

SUBURBAN STREET DESIGNATION


PEDESTRIAN REALM TRAVELWAY REALM
Landscape Tree
Minimum R.O.W. Sidewalk On-Street Parking Bike Lane Lane Widths ADT
or Swale
(feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (feet) (vpd)
(feet)
5 x 2 = 10 13 x 2 = 26 N/A N/A
5 x 2 = 10 5 x 2 = 10 8 x 2 = 16 N/A 2 x 12 = 24
60 5 x 2 = 10 7 x 2 = 14 N/A 6 x 2 = 12 500 – 5,000
2 x 12 + 6 ’
5 x 2 = 10 10 x 2 = 20 N/A N/A
(Median) = 30

10-42
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 11

GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering GEOTECHNICAL Requirements

Chapter 11

GEOTECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

11.01 INTRODUCTION

A. The chapter includes minimum geotechnical investigation requirements for design of utilities
and streets. Utilities include water lines, wastewater systems, and storm water drainage
conduits and open channels. Streets include design of street pavements.

B. The chapter is not intended to address tunnel projects.

11.02 REFERENCES

A. AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.

B. AREA – American Railroad Engineering Association.

C. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials.

D. OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

E. TxDOT – Texas Department of Transportation, Foundation Exploration and Design Manual.

F. TCEQ – Texas Commission on Environmental Quality.

G. HGSB – Houston Geological Society Bulletin dated March, 1985.

11.03 INVESTIGATION REQUIREMENTS

A. A geotechnical investigation is required prior to design for projects with following


construction items. Data from earlier project design activities can be incorporated if
sufficient and reliable for the current project. A geotechnical investigation by boring is
required for design of:

1. Underground utilities using open cut methods.

2. Underground utilities to be augered beneath existing streets, pipelines, or other


obstructions or structures.

3. Street paving.

4. Construction which could affect the integrity of adjacent structures, with the
exception of utilities at a depth less than 5 feet, interconnection such as service
connections, and meter vault installations.

11-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering GEOTECHNICAL Requirements

B. Install piezometer when water-bearing layers indicate necessity for monitoring.

1. Read water levels 24-hours after initial installation and at 30 days after installation.
Abandon piezometers in accordance with TTCEQ requirements.

2. Space piezometers no greater than 2500 feet apart.

C. The minimum geotechnical recommendation shall consist of the following:.

1. Open-cut Trenches: Bedding, backfill, excavation wall and bottom stability, thrust
restraint, ground water control requirements of boring locations, dewatering method,
and flexible pipe design parameters.

2. Auger Installation: Soil design parameters, ground stability, auger pit excavation
stability, and dewatering recommendation.

3. Appearance: Bearing capacity, lateral earth pressures, excavation stability, and


dewatering.

4. Open Channel: Slope angle or slope ratio, setback distance, and erosion protection.

5. Paving:

a. For rigid paving, pavement thickness and minimum subgrade treatment, as


required in Chapter 10, Street Paving Design Requirements.

b. For flexible paving, design Structural Number (SN), pavement section


thickness, and subgrade treatment, as required in Chapter 10, Street Paving
Design Requirements.

c. For overlay provide recommendations for rehabilitation.

D. All projects requiring a geotechnical investigation shall include a reconnaissance fault study
to evaluate the potential for known active faults that may impact the project. Conduct the
investigation in accordance with HGSC recommendations. If the project is part of a larger
tract for which reconnaissance fault study is available, the results of the study on the larger
tract may or will satisfy this requirement.

E. For privately funded subdivisions in the City or subdivision developments in the ETJ,
provide representative soil borings for all utility lines that conform to the spacing and number
of boring requirements of Paragraph 11.04. In cases where a development has conducted an
area wide geotechnical investigation, borings that are located within 250 feet of the proposed
lines may be used in lieu of specific project borings.

11-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering GEOTECHNICAL Requirements

F. Borehole sampling and testing for granular and cohesive soils shall include obtaining
undisturbed Shelby Tube samples in cohesive soils and Standard Penetration Test Split-
Barrel samples in granular, if not otherwise required in Paragraph 11.04. Continuous
sampling shall be performed to a minimum depth of 10 feet, and at 5-foot intervals below
that depth. Additional samples shall be obtained at strata changes encountered within the
standard 5-foot sampling intervals.

11.04 INVESTIGATION CRITERIA

A. The following are minimum requirements for frequency and depth of borings for water main,
sanitary sewer, storm water and box culvert projects.

1. Frequency: For Open-Cut construction and Auger Pits, soil borings shall be made at
a spacing not greater than 500 feet with additional borings at closer spacing to better
define areas of inconsistent stratigraphy. Make borings within an offset distance of
no more than 20 feet from the centerline alignment of the utility line or at the location
of the proposed structure.

2. Depth: For open-Cut Construction, boring depths shall be:

a. Trench depth plus five feet for trenches up to 10 feet deep.

b. Trench depth plus ten feet for trenches from 10 to 25 feet deep.

c. One and one half times trench depth for trenches greater than 25 feet deep.
Bore an additional 5 feet if the last planned sample is in water-bearing sand.

3. For Auger Pits, boring depth shall be auger pit depth plus five feet.

B. Lift Station Projects

1. In addition to spacing and boring depth requirements of Paragraph 11.04A, at least


one boring must be made within 20 feet of the proposed center of a lift station. For
lift stations 30 feet in diameter or larger, make one boring at the center add borings
around the periphery at maximum 50 feet spacing.

a. For City projects, the boring shall extend to:


(1) A depth of B below the bottom of the lift station or
(2) A depth of 0.75 D below the bottom of the lift station, whichever is
greater,
Where: B is the width or diameter of the lift station, and
D is the depth of the lift station or excavation.

b. For projects within the City’s extra territorial jurisdiction (ETJ), the boring
shall be to a minimum depth of 10 feet below the base of the structure.

11-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering GEOTECHNICAL Requirements

2. Install a piezometer within 20 feet of the center of the lift station. Read water levels
24 hours after drilling and again at 30 days after initial installation.

3. Other Structures. The geotechnical engineer shall establish a boring program in


consultation with the owner and structural engineer.

C. Open Channels.

1. Soil borings shall be made at a spacing not greater than 500 feet with additional
boring at closer spacing to better define areas of inconsistent stratigraphy.

2. For channel a depth D of less than or equal to 10 feet extend boring D feet below the
ditch bottom.

3. For channel depth greater than 10 feet and less than or equal to 20 feet, extend boring
10 feet below the ditch bottom.

4. For channel depth greater than 20 feet establish boring depth to provide sufficient
geotechnical information for design.

5. Soils information for culverts in roadside ditches of less than five foot depth shall be
obtained from soil borings made for the paving design, as described in Paragraph
11.04.D. Street Paving.

D. Street Paving

1. Soil borings shall be made at a spacing not greater than 500 feet.

2. The depth of borings shall be at least 5 feet below the top of the curb for curb-and-
gutter sections and 5 feet below the crown of the road for open ditch sections, or 5
feet below ditch invert, which is greater.

11.05 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM

A. Laboratory Tests may include but not be limited to the following:

1. ASTM D 4318 – Liquid Limit, Plastic Limits and Plasticity Index of Soils.

2. ASTM D 1140 – Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 Sieve.

3. ASTM D 2216 – Laboratory Determination of Water Content of Soil, Rock and Soil-
Aggregate Mixture.

4. ASTM D 422 – Particle Size Analysis of Soils.

11-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering GEOTECHNICAL Requirements

5. ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.

6. ASTM D 2166 – Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soils.

7. ASTM D 2850 - Unconsolidated Undrained Compressive Strength of Cohesive Seals


in Triaxial Compression.

8. ASTM D 2435 – One-Dimensional Consolidation Properties of Soils.

9. ASTM D 698 – Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard


Effort.

10. ASTM D 1883 – CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory- Compacted Soils.

11.06 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Within the public domain, the locations and elevations of boreholes and piezometers shall be
surveyed by the Design Consultant. Elevation and coordinates shall be shown on boring
logs. Station and offset shall be shown on boring for street projects and utility line work.

11.07 SITE RESTORATION

A. Clean boring sites along the developed right-of-way by removing cuttings and mud and other
debris. Fill ruts or pits in the ground to original conditions and elevation.

A. Abandonment of Borings and Piezometers

1. Abandon piezometers abandon in accordance with TCEQ Rules.

2. Backfill boreholes with cement grout, using tremie method, if depth exceeds 10 feet
or if water is encountered. For depts. Less than or equal to 10 feet, and when water is
to encountered, soil backfill tamped unto the borehole is acceptable. Boreholes or
piezometers installed in know contaminated areas, or4 in which contamination
otherwise has been detected, shall be abandoned in accordance with the applicable
provisions of TCEQ Rules.

C. Restoration of Cores Through Pavement. Boreholes or other cored penetrations of


pavements shall be restored with the same or equivalent materials as the existing pavement.
Larger penetrations shall be repaired following City of Houston Standard Detail No. 02902-
01, Pavement Repair Details. Do not restore the pavement until the borehole grout has taken
initial set to allow for any settlement or shrinkage of grout.

11.08 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

11-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering GEOTECHNICAL Requirements

A. A sample Table of Contents for a typical geotechnical report follows.

1. Summary
2. Field Investigation and Laboratory Testing.

3. Subsurface Conditions

4. Engineering Analysis and Recommendations

5. Construction Considerations

6. Attachments

B. When directed, a geotechnical report for trench safety systems shall be provided for a
specified City of Houston projects. Report shall satisfy statutory requirements for
contracting for trench safety construction.

END OF CHAPTER

11-6
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 12

STREET CUT REQUIREMENTS


CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Cut Requirements

Chapter 12

STREET CUT REQUIREMENTS

12.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A Criteria for street pavement cuts, excavation, backfill, and pavement restoration in
Public Ways.

B. This chapter applies to excavation under paved surfaces in Public Ways which have
been improved for street, sidewalk, surface drainage, or related public transportation
infrastructure.

12.02 References

A. Refer to the list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements.

B. City of Houston Procedural Guidelines for Planning and Permitting of Excavations in


Public Ways, latest revision.

12.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation – An activity that disturbs, alters, or penetrates any portion of the public
way that has been improved for street, driveway, sidewalk, surface drainage, or
related public transportation infrastructure purposes. The term includes but is not
limited to cutting, tunneling, jacking and boring, backfilling, restoring, and repairing
the public way. The term does not include a transportation improvement or
maintenance of publicly owned utility systems, such as water and wastewater lines
and facilities.

B. Backfill – Excavation fill material that meets city specified quality requirements or
the placement thereof.

C. Facility – Any structure device or other thing whatsoever that may be installed or
maintained in, or, within, under, over or above a public way by an excavation.

D. Five – Year CIP – Street improvement projects included in a Capital Improvement


Program by the City of Houston, Harris County, METRO, TxDOT, or other
organization for construction.

E. Hole – Excavation in the Public Way with the excavation having a length less than
the width of the pavement.

12-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Cut Requirements

A. Patch – Method of pavement replacement that is temporary in nature. A patch


consists of: (1) the compaction of the subbase and aggregate base, and (2) the
replacement, in kind, of the existing pavement for a minimum of two feet beyond the
edges of the excavation in all directions. A patch is full restoration only when the
pavement is included in the City of Houston’s Five Year Capital Improvement Plan.

B. Public Way – Any public street right-of-way located in the city, including the entire
area between the boundary lines of every way (including but not limited to roads.,
streets, alleys, highways, boulevards, bridges tunnels, or similar thoroughfares),
whether acquired by purchase, grant, or dedication and acceptance by the city or by
the public that has been opened to use of the public for purpose of vehicular travel.

C. Restoration – The process by which an excavated public way and surrounding area,
including pavement and foundation, is returned to the same condition that existed
before excavation.

D. Trench – An excavation in the pavement with the excavation having length equal to
or greater than the width of the pavement.

12.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1. Design project so that restoration returns public way to the same condition that
existed prior excavation. Base minimum limits and methods required for restoration
on City Standard Details.

B. Comply with requirements of 6.08A., Open Cut Construction in Street Pavement, for
all open-cut construction including excavation for auger or directional drilling
insertion pits.

1. Saw cut existing pavements along lines parallel to and perpendicular to


traveled way center lines unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer.

2. For concrete pavements, conform to requirements of Paragraphs 10.04, K.,


5., 10., and 11.

C. Prepare plan view drawings for all excavations that identify and locate existing
underground facilities. The drawings, or verification statements, shall confirm that the
underground facilities have been identified, located, and marked by the following
organizations:

1. Texas Underground Facility Notification Corporation,

2. City of Houston Public Utilities (water and sewer), and

3. City of Houston Traffic Signal Section.

12-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Street Cut Requirements

D. The City may require plan and profile drawings for complex projects or when the
constructing agency has demonstrated previous non-compliance with underground
facility location procedures.

E. Plan view drawings shall show, at a minimum, the following information for the
project area:

1. Topographical features.

2. Existing public and private utilities.

3. Significant landscaping or other structures which might impact


construction or construction related activities.

4. Location and dimensions of proposed surface cuts.

5. Location and depth of existing and proposed mains, cables, conduits,


switches, and related equipment and facilities.

6. Use baseline offsets from property lines, centerline of the public way, or
curb lines; or a coordinate system acceptable to the City.

F. Final drawings shall include a list City of Houston Standard Specifications and
related standard details for excavation, bedding, backfilling, and pavement repair and
resurfacing.

12.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. For projects which include conduits, duct banks or pipelines over 1”, have final
design drawings sealed, signed, and dated by the Professional Engineer responsible
for development of the drawings.

END OF CHAPTER

12-3
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 13
STORMWATER QUALITY DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

Chapter 13

STORM WATER QUALITY DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

13.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Criteria for the design of storm water pollution prevention procedures and controls for
construction activities.

B. Criteria for the design of permanent storm water pollution prevention procedures and
controls to minimize impacts for new development and decrease impacts for redevelopment
on tracts of land of 5 acres or more.

13.02 REFERENCES

A. Storm Water Quality Management Guidance Manual, 2001 edition, City of Houston.

B. Storm Water Management Handbook for Construction Activities, 2001 edition, City of
Houston.

C. Select Minimum Design Criteria for Implementation of Best Management Practices for
Water Runoff Treatment, 2001 edition, City of Houston.

D. Article XII of Chapter 47 of the City of Houston Code of Ordinances.

E. National Pollution Discharge Elimination System Permit Number TXS001201.

13.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Dwelling Unit - A structure, or a portion of a structure, that has independent living including
provisions for nontransient sleeping, cooking and sanitation.

B. Impervious Surface - Any area that does not readily absorb water, including, but not limited
to, building roofs, parking and driveway areas, sidewalks, compacted or rolled areas, and
paved recreation areas.

C. New Development - Development on a currently undeveloped parcel of land five acres or


larger without regard to the amount of land that will actually be disturbed, except for
development on an existing undeveloped and undivided parcel of five acres or more of one
single-family dwelling unit and/or the types of non-commercial building(s) typically
associated with a single-family dwelling unit, including, but not limited to, a garage, carport
or barn. If the occupancy for any structure excluded under the foregoing exception at any

13-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

time changes to a commercial use, the owner of the property will at that time have to comply
with all requirements of this program.

D. Significant redevelopment - Changes of one acre or more to the impervious surface on a five
acre or larger developed parcel.

E. Applicant - The owner of the land on which the new development or significant
redevelopment will occur, or his authorized agent.

F. NPDES - National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System.

G. SWQMP - Storm Water Quality Management Plan.

H. Regulated Construction Activity - Construction activities, including clearing, grading, and


excavation, that disturb either five acres or more, or less than five acres if the activities are
part of a larger plan of development or sale.

13.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Construction Activity:

1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans (SWPPPs) and Best Management Practices
(BMPs) will be developed in accordance with the Storm Water Management
Handbook for Construction Activities.

2. Construction plans will include a note requiring contractor to comply with


construction permit including preparation of a SWPPP and to provide a copy of the
Notice of Intent (NOI) and maintenance checklist to the City 5 work days prior to
commencement of any construction activity to City Engineer or Building Official.

A. New Development and Significant Redevelopment:

1. All design must be consistent with the Storm Water Quality Guidance Manual
(SWQGM) and the Minimum Design Criteria for Certain Storm Water Runoff
Treatment Options (MDC), 2001 edition.

2. A letter of availability must be included with the Storm Water Quality Management
Plan

3. Pollutants expected from the site must be identified. BMPs must be designed and
selected to remove the pollutants identified.

4. At a minimum, the system must be designed to treat the first 1/2 inch of runoff,
except as noted in the SWQGM or the MDC.
13-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

5. BMPs listed in the SWQGM but not in the MDC may be acceptable for
implementation pending review of design calculations and site applicability. BMPs
not listed in the SWQGM may be considered on a case by case basis. Acceptance of
these BMPs will require not only review of design calculations and site applicability,
but also review of case studies or other data provided by an uninterested third party
indicating the effectiveness of the BMP. All calculations and literature must be
provided as part of the plan submittal.

6. In addition to meeting the storm water quality requirements discussed in the Design
Manual Chapter 13 and its referenced documents, the storm water system must meet
the flood control requirements presented in Chapter 9 of the Design Manual.

C. Low Impact Development (LID):

1. Bioretention

a. Overview

Bioretention is a terrestrial-based (up-land as opposed to wetland), water


quality and water quantity control practice using the chemical, biological and
physical properties of plants, microbes and soils for removal of pollutants
from storm water runoff. Some of the processes that may take place in a
bioretention facility include: sedimentation, adsorption, filtration,
volatilization, ion exchange, decomposition, phytoremediation,
bioremediation, and storage capacity. Bioretention may also be designed to
mimic predevelopment hydrology.

b. Design Criteria
(1) Determine volume of bioretention area below maximum design water
surface. Depth of ponding limited to a maximum of 6 inches.
(2) Demonstrate that sufficient area contributes stormwater runoff to the
bioretention area to fill the area to its maximum design water surface
for the design storm under consideration.
(3) Using in-situ or new soils, design the bioretention area to empty within
48 hours. This may be accomplished through infiltration,
evapotranspiration, and/or the design of a subsurface drainage system.
(4) Mitigating detention volume requirements can be reduced by the
volume in the bioretention area below its maximum design water
surface.
(5) Runoff from commercial areas and parking lots require pretreatment;
grass buffer strip or vegetated swales, prior to draining into
bioretention area.
(6) Infiltration rates less than 0.5 inches per hour will require a subsurface
drainage system.
13-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

(7) Geotechnical testing is required to confirm infiltration rates.

c. Inspection and Maintenance Requirements


(1) Verify presence of vegetation considered in design computations (if
any) quarterly.
(2) Verify the bioretention area has adequate volume quarterly by
checking whether sedimentation has encroached on design volume.
This can be done by comparing actual maximum depth against design
maximum depth.
(3) Verify ability of bioretention area to drain within 48 hours twice
yearly after rainfall event.
(4) Correct deficiencies related to items 1-3 above as needed.

2. Infiltration Trenches

a. Overview

Trenches or basins that temporarily detain a design water quality volume


while allowing infiltration to occur over a prescribed period of time. Trenches
are applicable for both water quality and water quantity control practices.

b. Design Criteria
(1) In-situ subsoil shall have a minimum infiltration rate of 0.5 inches per
hour. Geotechnical testing including one boring per 5000 square feet
or two per project is required to confirm infiltration rate.
(2) Subsurface drainage systems are required where the in-situ subsoil rate
is less than 0.5 inches per hour or where the project is constructed on
fill soils.
(3) Avoid placement on slopes greater than 15% in fill areas.
(4) Design of the trench area to empty with 48 hours.
(5) Backfill using clean aggregate larger than 1.5” and smaller than 3”
surrounded by engineered filter fabric.
(6) Provide overflow structure or channel to accommodate larger runoff
events.
(7) Provide 4” PVC observation well into subgrade.
(8) Runoff from commercial areas and parking lots require pretreatment;
grass buffer strip or vegetated swabs, prior to draining into infiltration
trench.
(9) Locate bottom of facility at least 4 ft. above seasonal high water table
elevation.
(10) Locate at least 100 ft. from any water supply well.
(11) Maximum contributing drainage area is 5 acres or less.
(12) Mitigating detention volume can be reduced by the amount of
infiltration into the subsoil and the volume of voids within the trench
area.
13-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

c. Inspection and Maintenance Requirements


(1) Inspect observation well for water level and drainage times. Conduct
landscaping, mowing, and desilting of facility.

3. Porous Pavement

a. Overview

Porous Pavement consists of a permeable surface course that allows


infiltration of stormwater runoff into a permeable layer of uniformly graded
stone bed. The pavement surface may either be soft (grass) or hard (concrete,
asphalt or advance gravel systems). The underlying permeable layer serves as
a storage reservoir for runoff and/or infiltration. Porous Pavement is
applicable for both water quality and water quantity control practices.

b. Design Criteria
(1) In-situ subsoil shall have a minimum infiltration rate of 0.5 inches per
hour. Geotechnical testing including one boring per 5000 square feet
or two per project is required to confirm infiltration rate.
(2) Subsurface drainage systems are required where the in-situ subsoil rate
is less than 0.5 inches per hour or where the project is constructed on
fill soils.
(3) Shall be limited to lightly traveled surfaces such as parking pads in
parking lots, trails and sidewalks. Porous pavement is not permitted for
residential driveways (area of pavement likely to be coated or paved
over because of a lack of awareness) and commercial areas designed
for heavy traffic volume and/or vehicles.
(4) Typical section of porous pavement and underlying permeable stone
bed is shown on Figure 1 followed by a description of each layer of
material.
(5) Subsurface drainage systems are required to be drained in 48 hours.
(6) If the volume of storage within the voids of the subsurface drainage
system’s stone bed meets the detention volume rate of 0.5 acre-feet per
acre of development or 0.2 acre-feet per acre for tracts less than one
acre, the area of the porous pavement is considered undeveloped.
Otherwise, the total voids storage volume will be credited toward the
required detention volume.
(7) If the time of concentration (Tc) from a project site that includes
porous pavement and subsurface drainage system, is equal to the
undeveloped time of concentration, the development of the project site
is considered undeveloped.
(8) Soft porous pavement area shall be considered undeveloped.
(9) The cross-section typically consists of four layers, as shown in Figure
1. The aggregate reservoir can sometimes be avoided or minimized if
13-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

the sub-grade is sandy and there is adequate time to infiltrate the


necessary runoff volume into the sandy soil without by-passing the
water quality volume. Descriptions of each of the layers is presented
below:

Porous Concrete Layer – The porous concrete layer consists of an


open-graded concrete mixture usually ranging from depths of 2 to 4
inches depending on required bearing strength and pavement design
requirements. Porous concrete can be assumed to contain 18 percent
voids (porosity = 0.18) for design purposes. Thus, for example, a 4
inch thick porous concrete layer would hold 0.72 inches of rainfall.
The omission of the fine aggregate provides the porosity of the porous
pavement. To provide a smooth riding surface and to enhance handling
and placement a coarse aggregate of 3/8 inch maximum size is
normally used.

Top Filter Layer – Consists of a 0.5 inch diameter crushed stone to a


depth of 1 to 2 inches. This layer serves to stabilize the porous
concrete layer. Can be combined with reservoir layer using suitable
stone.

Reservoir Layer – The reservoir gravel base course consists of washed,


bank-run gravel, 1.5 to 2.5 inches in diameter with a void space of
about 40 %. The depth of this layer depends on the desired storage
volume, which is a function of the soil infiltration rate and void spaces,
but typically ranges from two to four feet. The layer must have a
minimum depth of nine inches. The layer should be designed to drain
completely in 48 hours. The layer should be designed to store at a
minimum the water quality volume (WQv). Aggregate contaminated
with soil should not be used. A porosity value (void space/total
volume) of 0.32 should be used in calculations unless aggregate
specific data exist.

Bottom Filter Layer – The surface of the subgrade should be a 6 inch


layer of sand (ASTM C-33 concrete sand) or a 2 inch thick layer of 0.5
inch crushed stone, and be completely flat to promote infiltration
across the entire surface. This layer serves to stabilize the reservoir
layer, to protect the underlying soil from compaction, and act as the
interface between the reservoir layer and the filter fabric covering the
underlying soil.

Filter Fabric – It is very important to line the entire trench area,


including the sides, with filter fabric prior to placement of the
aggregate. The filter fabric serves a very important function by
inhibiting soil from migrating into the reservoir layer and reducing
13-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

storage capacity. Fabric should be MIRFI # 14 N or equivalent.

Underlying Soil – The underlying soil should have an infiltration


capacity of at least 0.5 in/hr, but preferably greater than 0.50 in/hr. as
initially determined from NRCS soil textural classification, and
subsequently confirmed by field geotechnical tests. The minimum
geotechnical testing is one test hole per 5000 square feet, with a
minimum of two borings per facility (taken within the proposed limits
of the facility). Infiltration trenches cannot be used in fill soils. Soils at
the lower end of this range may not be suited for a full infiltration
system. Test borings are recommended to determine the soil
classification, seasonal high ground water table elevation, and
impervious substrata, and an initial estimate of permeability. Often a
double-ring infiltrometer test is done at subgrade elevation to
determine the impermeable layer, and for safety, one-half the
measured value is allowed for infiltration calculations.

* Figure 1 and cross section description obtained from the Georgia


Stormwater Management Manual.

c. Inspection and Maintenance Requirements


(1) Initial inspection of porous pavement shall be monthly for the first
three months post construction.
(2) Semi-annual inspection to ensure pavement surface is free of sediment.
(3) Vacuum sweep hard porous pavement followed by high pressure
hosing to keep voids free of sediment quarterly.
(4) Annually inspect pavement surface and subsurface drainage system (if
any) for deterioration, spalling or malfunctioning.

4. Vegetative Swales

a. Overview

Vegetative Swales (dry or wet) are earthen, planted stormwater conveyances


designed to filter a shallow depth of runoff (<4”) for water quality
improvement and to infiltrate stormwater. There are two types, dry or wet.
Dry swales include an underdrain system. Wet swales do not. Swales are
typically designed to convey runoff from larger storm events, however,
treatment and infiltration is reduced during high flows. Infiltrative soils or an
engineered porous subgrade is required for infiltration use. Vegetative Swales
are applicable for both water quality and water quantity control practices.

b. Design Criteria for Dry Swale


(1) Soil infiltration rate of 0.27 to 0.50 inches/hour.
(2) Trapezoidal or parabolic cross section.
13-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

(3) Bottom width should be 2 ft. wide minimum or 6 ft. wide max.
(4) Longitudinal slope should range from 1% to 6%.
(5) Flow depth should be less than 4 inches for water quality treatment.
(6) Flow velocity should be less than 1 fps for water quality, less than 5
fps for 2-yr storm (non-erosive velocities for grass and soils).
(7) Length should yield a 10 minute residence time.
(8) Side slopes should be flatter than 3:1.
(9) Maximum ponding time should be < 48 hours.
(10) Use proper vegetation (grass or wetland plants) consistent with
climate, ecoregion, soils, and hydric conditions.
(11) Provide at least 3” of free-board during design storm.
(12) Provide pretreatment of runoff into the swale.
(13) Design details are shown in Figures 1 and 2, below.

c. Design Criteria for Wet Swale


(1) Soil infiltration rate of 0.27 to 0.50 inches/hour.
(2) Trapezoidal or parabolic cross section.
(3) Bottom width should be 2 ft. wide minimum or 8 ft. wide max. to
avoid gullying or channel braiding.
(4) Longitudinal slope should range from 1% to 6%.
(5) Flow depth should be less than 4 inches for water quality treatment.
(6) Flow velocity should be less than 1 fps for water quality, less than 5
fps for 2-yr storm (non-erosive velocities for grass and soils).
(7) Length should yield a 10 minute residence time.
(8) Slide slopes should be flatter than 3:1.
(9) Maximum ponding time should be < 48 hours.
(10) Use proper vegetation (grass or wetland plants) consistent with
climate, ecoregion, soils, and hydric conditions.
(11) Provide at least 3” of free-board during design storm.
(12) Provide pretreatment of runoff into the swale.
(13) Design details are shown in Figures 3 and 4, below.

d. Inspection and Maintenance Requirements


(1) Mow dry swales as required during growing season to maintain grass
heights in the 4 to 6 inch range. Wet swales, employing wetland
vegetation or other low maintenance ground cover do not require
frequent mowing. Remove sediment when 25% of the original water
quality volume has been exceeded.

5. Green Roof

a. Overview

A green roof, in simplest terms, is a vegetated roof. The vegetation varies, but
must be suitable to the local climate and be drought tolerant, unless a method
13-8
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

of irrigation is also installed. Installation generally consists of a waterproof


membrane installed over a suitably constructed roof deck. For in-situ
installations, an under-drain drainage system is installed over the membrane.
A lightweight engineered soil is installed on top of the under-drain, as fill dirt
or topsoil is typically too heavy to use in rooftop applications. The engineered
soil is then planted with select vegetation. If a modular system is selected, the
drainage system may already be incorporated into the design, along with the
soil and vegetation, depending on the manufacturer. The substrate material
and depth are also factors that influence the efficiency of the green roof to
store and/ or treat stormwater. Roofs consisting of relatively thin soil layers,
called extensive roofs, are not as heavy as the intensive roofs, which are
covered with thicker soil layers.

b. Design Criteria
(1) Vegetation suitable to the climate and preferably a species that is
drought tolerant, unless a method of irrigation is provided, should be
installed. The effect of wind on the vegetation should also be
considered when selecting the roof foliage, as wind velocities are
typically higher at rooftop elevations.
(2) The amount of credit given for the rainfall amount stored shall be as
prescribed by the manufacturer for a modular system.
(3) The amount of credit given for the rainfall amount stored for non-
modular systems shall be calculated for the engineered soil. The rate
shall be derived by in-situ porosity testing. The porosity test shall be
performed four times with the first time results being discarded and the
three remaining results averaged. The test shall require the first sample
remain wet a minimum of 1 hour. The subsequent porosity tests shall
be performed the same day. In no case should the storage volume be
credited more than 33% of total volume, as that is the assumed volume
of clean graded washed gravel.
(4) The roof membrane must be sufficiently designed and installed to
pond a minimum of 1-inch of water at the most shallow point on the
roof for 24 hours without leaks. This should be tested in the same
manner as shower pans are tested under the building code.
Additionally, special consideration should be given for the plant root
structure and prevention of soil migration during membrane selection.
A root barrier may also be required to protect the waterproof
membrane integrity.
(5) The under-drain drainage system should be designed for the selected
plant’s tolerance for drought and varying soil moisture contents by
maintaining the proper balance of moisture and aerobic conditions
within the soil media for optimum vegetation sustainability. Design
provisions should address higher volume rainfall events to keep
excessive amounts of water from ponding on top of the soil, to prevent
erosion, and to prevent soil media saturation for extended periods.
13-9
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

Structural calculations shall be submitted that demonstrate the


structure’s ability to sustain the additional loading of the green roof
appurtenances plus the maximum water weight that could be stored.

c. Inspection and Maintenance Requirements


(1) A maintenance plan for the green roof system should be developed in
accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s instructions and plant
species selected. At a minimum, maintenance inspections should be
performed at least four times per year. The maintenance plan should
include provisions for vegetation maintenance and replacement as
needed to maintain a minimum 80% coverage/survival rate in order to
sustain storm water quality and/or detention credits. Irrigation may be
required initially in order to establish the roof vegetation and to supply
water under severe drought conditions. Any requirements for initial or
intermittent use of fertilizer and pesticides for disease or insect control
should be identified in the plan. Plant species should be carefully
selected to minimize intermittent fertilizer and pesticide applications.
(2) Each green roof installation shall be inspected by the agency
responsible for issuing the storm water quality or detention credits to
check compliance with the approved drawings before final acceptance
is issued and the proper credits are approved. At a minimum, the
following items should be checked during the inspection:
(a) Results from porosity testing (for non-modular installations).
(b) Certification from a registered Professional Engineer or
registered Architect that the green roof, including membrane,
drain system and engineered soil system, was installed per the
approved (permitted) drawings and operates as designed.
(c) Drawings of the green roof installation.
(3) Once the green roof is installed and established, additional inspections
will be required in order to properly maintain the vegetation, drainage
system and roof membrane. Routine inspections should be conducted
and associated maintenance activities performed on the following:
(a) Joints at adjoining walls, roof penetrations for vents, electrical
and air conditioning conduits should be inspected regularly for
leaks. The ceilings located directly below the green roof
installation should also be visually inspected for signs of water
staining or leaking.
(b) Designated drainage paths and drainage system components
should be inspected to ensure proper surface drainage is
maintained and that the soil layer is drained to prevent
excessively saturated soils. Vegetation selected to tolerate
drought conditions may rot or die if the soil is allowed to
become saturated for extended periods.
(c) Vegetation should be visually inspected to identify weeds,
accumulated trash or debris, dead or dying vegetation, disease
13-10
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

or other infestation problems requiring maintenance attention.


Weeds and dead vegetation should be removed on a regular
basis, especially right after the roof is planted. If a certain plant
or grass species continues to die, that plant or grass should be
removed and replaced with a more tolerant species. Certified
professionals should only be used to apply chemical
applications for the control of disease or insects at trouble spot
locations.
(d) Trimming and pruning should be done in accordance with
horticulture practices to keep vegetation aesthetically groomed.

6. Hard Roof

a. Overview

Horizontal roof surfaces can be used to attenuate peak runoff associated with
rainfall and effectively detain flow resulting from smaller rain events.
The detention volume can be controlled in several ways, but typically a simple
drain ring is placed around the roof drains. As stormwater begins to pond on
the roof, flow into the roof drains is controlled by orifices or slits in the drain
ring. Extreme flows can be designed to overflow the ring and drain directly to
the roof drains or be directed to openings in the parapet walls to prevent
structural and flood damage to the roof. The roof deck must be designed to
withstand the live load and be properly waterproofed.

b. Design Criteria
(1) The structural capability of the roof system must be considered when
designing a temporary rooftop storage system. For example, a three-
inch water depth is equivalent to a load of 15.6 lbs/sq.ft., which is less
than most current building code requirements for live loads.
(2) Consideration must be given to the placement of electrical devices on
the roof, such as air conditioning or ventilation systems and lights, and
proper measures should be taken to protect the electrical devices from
the collected water.
(3) Overflow mechanisms shall be provided so that there is no danger of
overloading the roof storage system during major storms. Additionally,
roof slopes should be designed to drain positively toward the roof
drains to help minimize localized roof ponding or ‘bird bath’
formation after the detained water volume is released.
(4) It is recommended that Chapter 16 of the International Building Code,
2003 Edition be used for additional structural criteria along with
ASCE Standard Reference Number 7, Minimum Design Loads for
Buildings and Other Structures.
(5) The amount of credit given for detention volume for rooftop storage
should take into account that many flat roofs already pond significant
13-11
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

amounts of water; although not by design. Therefore, when measuring


credit given for hard roof detention volume, it is recommended that
only credit be given for the total rooftop storage volume less the
rooftop storage volume associated with the first inch of rain. Typically,
rooftop storage volumes are only effective during the smaller, more
frequent rainfall events as the larger, less frequent storms typically
exceed the rooftop storage capacity.

c. Inspection and Maintenance Requirements


(1) Each hard roof installation shall be inspected by the agency
responsible for issuing the detention credits to check compliance with
the approved drawings before final acceptance is issued and the proper
credits are approved. At a minimum, the following items should be
checked during the inspection:
(a) Roof penetrations for ventilation, electrical or plumbing
connections to verify proper sealing against leaks.
(b) The overflow system that drains excessive rainfall off of the
hard roof once the maximum storage volume is captured.
(c) Certification from a registered Professional Engineer or
registered Architect that the hard roof, drain system and
appurtenances have been installed and operate as designed.
(d) Drawings of the hard roof installation.
2. Once the hard roof is installed, additional inspections will be required
in order to properly maintain the drainage system and roof membrane.
Routine inspections should be conducted and associated maintenance
activities performed on the following:
(a) Designated drainage paths and drainage system components
should be inspected to ensure proper surface drainage is
maintained and that the roof is draining properly after the
collected stormwater volume is released from a rainfall event.
(b) Routine inspections to collect and remove any trash or debris
from the roof should be conducted to prevent clogging of the
roof drains and overflow drainage system.
(c) Visible cracks in the roof surface should be identified and
repaired in accordance with the roof manufacturer’s
recommendations in order to maintain roof integrity.

7. Rain Barrels

a. Overview

A cistern (“rain barrel”), ranging from 55 gallons to several hundred gallons


in capacity, is placed near the down spout of a house and is used to collect
rain water runoff from the roof of the house. The captured water is then
typically used as a pure water source for plants and lawns.
13-12
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

b. Design Criteria
(1) Gutters and downspouts carry water from the rooftops to rain barrels
as shown on Figure 1.
(2) Screens are required on gutters to prevent clogging.
(3) Rain barrels should be equipped with a drain spigot.
(4) Overflow outlet must be provided to bypass rain barrel from large
rainfall events.
(5) Rain barrel must be designed with removable, child resistant covers
and mosquito screening.
(6) Minimum rain barrel capacity equal to 1” of runoff from roof top
surface area.

c. Maintenance and Inspection


(1) Empty rain barrel after each rainfall event.
(2) Rain barrel should be inspected annually.

13.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Final design drawings, BMPs, SWPPPs, and SWQMPs will be sealed, signed, and dated by
the Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas responsible for their development.

END OF CHAPTER

13-13
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

13-14
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

13-15
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

13-16
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

13-17
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Storm Water Quality Design Requirements

13-18
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 14

FACILITY DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Facility Design Requirements

Chapter 14

FACILITY DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

14.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Incorporation of Public Works and d Engineering Manuals and Guidelines for water and
wastewater related facilities.

14.02 REFERENCES

A. Water Plant Guidelines

B. Engineering Design Manual for Submersible Lift Stations.

C. Drawings for Submersible Lift Stations.

14.04

B. Conform to design requirements of the latest published edition of each reference manual.

END OF CHAPTER

14-1
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 15

TRAFFIC AND SIGNAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS


CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Chapter 15

TRAFFIC AND SIGNAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

15.01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

15.02 REFERENCES

15.03 DEFINITIONS

15.04 TRAFFIC STUDIES

15.05 RESERVED FOR TRAFFIC VOLUMES

15.06 RESERVED FOR SCHOOL ZONE POLICIES

15.07 RESERVED FOR STREET EXTENSIONS.

15.08 ACCESS MANAGEMENT STANDARDS

15.09 RESERVED FOR SIGN STANDARDS

15.10 RESERVED FOR PAVEMENT MARKINGS

15.11 TRAFFIC SIGNALS

15.12 RESERVED FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL

15.13 RESERVED FOR MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCES

15.14 RESERVED FOR ON-STREET PARKING

15.15 RESERVED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD TRAFFIC PROJECTS

15.16 RESERVED FOR STREET LIGHTING

15.17 RESERVED FOR STREET CLOSURES

15.18 RESERVED FOR INTERSECTION TURNING TEMPLATES / DESIGN VEHICLES

15.19 RESERVED FOR TRAFFIC CALMING

15-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

15.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements

B. AASHTO – American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials

C. ITE – Institute of Transportation Engineers

D. TRB – Transportation Research Board

E. TxDOT- Texas Department of Transportation

F. IBC – International Building Code

G. Trip Generation, Current Edition (An ITE Informational Report, Institute of Transportation
Engineers, Washington D.C.).

15.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Access Management is the systematic control of the location, spacing, design and operation
of driveways, median openings, intersections, and auxiliary lanes.

B. ADT is the average daily traffic volume. It represents the total two-way traffic on a street for
some period less than a year, divided by the total number of days it represents, and includes
both weekday and weekend traffic. Usually, ADT is adjusted for day of the week, seasonal
variations, and/or vehicle classifications.

C. Auxiliary Lane is a lane striped for use as an acceleration lane, deceleration lane, right-turn
lane, or left-turn lane, but not for through traffic use.

D. Central Business District shall mean the area beginning at the intersection of the centerline
of United States Highway 59 and the centerline of Interstate Highway 45; thence in a
northwesterly and northerly direction along the centerline of Interstate Highway 45 to its
intersection with the centerline of Interstate Highway 10; thence in an easterly direction
along the centerline of Interstate Highway 10 to its intersection with the centerline of United
States Highway 59; thence in a southwesterly direction along the centerline of United States
Highway 59 to its intersection with Interstate Highway 45, the point of the beginning.

E. Connection Spacing is the distance between connections, which is measured along the edge
of the traveled way from the closest edge of pavement of the first access connection to the
closest edge of pavement of the second access connection.

15-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

F. Corner Clearance is the distance along the edge of the traveled way from the closest edge of
pavement of the intersecting public or private street to the closest edge of pavement of the
nearest driveway.

G. Design Exception shall mean any City Engineer approved variation from the requirements of
section 15.08 of this chapter.

H. Driveway is an access connection constructed within the public right-of-way, used to


connect a public or private street with adjacent property.

I. Intersection Limits shall mean the functional portion of the intersection and shall be defined
as the extent or limit of turning bays located at the inters, or the limits as defined by the City
Engineer.

J. Joint Access See "Shared Access"

K. Median is the portion of a divided street separating opposing traffic flows. A median may
be traversable or nontraversable.

L. Shared Access is a single connection serving two or more adjoining lots or parcels.

M. Sight Distance is the distance visible to the driver of a passenger vehicle measured along the
normal travel path of a street from a designated vehicle location and to a specified height
above the street when the view is unobstructed by traffic. Refer to AASHTO, Geometric
Design of Highways and Streets (Current Edition), for application to specific design needs
such as stopping sight distance, other sight requirements.

N. Storage Lane Length is the portion of an auxiliary lane required to store the number of
vehicles expected to accumulate in the lane (95th percentile queue).

15.04 TRAFFIC STUDIES

A. APPLICABILITY

1. Two levels of traffic studies are identified and are dependent upon specific site
location conditions, adjacent street configurations/capacities and traffic generation
rates for proposed development. These studies are referred to as “Access
Management Data” and “Traffic Impact Studies (TIA)”. Figure 15.04.01 provides an
overview of the submittal and review process.

2. For each proposed development or redevelopment, an Access Management Data


Summary Form (FORM A in this section) must be submitted. Construction,
reconstruction, remodel, or additions of a single family residence will not require
traffic impact studies with permitting. Additional traffic impacts are to be analyzed
for the following conditions:

15-3
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

a. If proposed changes to the site are expected to generate 100 or more new peak
hour trips (PHT) then a TIA is required. This can be determined by submitting an
Access Management Data Summary Form.

b. If the submittal of an Access Management Data Summary Form as part of an


interim site review is determined by the City to not provide enough detailed
traffic information related to the proposed development.

c. A development plat application or building permit application for new development


or redevelopment is submitted and the applicant voluntarily submits a TIA to
support the trip generation rates and access management needs to the adjacent
street system for the proposed project.

Applicant Analysis The City


Engineer

Submit Access Mgmt Data


Summary Form

Yes
Meets Thresholds TIA Required

No
Scoping Meeting
Permitting Allowed

TIA Submittal Initial Review

Mitigation Measures
Meeting

TIA Revise Final Review

Permitting Appeal Objection


Denied TIA Approval
to Findings

Permitting Allowed

Figure 15.04.01 Overview of Traffic Impact Analysis Process

15-4
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

B. INTERIM SITE REVIEWS

Interim site reviews allow applicants to submit information regarding proposed development
for review of access management proposals/issues. The applicant shall submit information
on the form shown on the following page, along with site plan layouts depicting all access
connections to public streets and onsite traffic related features (loading docks, emergency
lanes, driveway entrances and exits). Such site plans shall also depict existing surface
features (natural and man-made) on adjacent street rights-of-way and easements.

15-5
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON
FORM A
ACCESS MANAGEMENT
DATA SUMMARY

Applicant Information:

Property Owner

Name: ___________________________________________

Address: ___________________________________________

City/State/Zip: ___________________________________________

Telephone: _____________________

Email Address: _____________________

Agent

Name: ___________________________________________

Firm Name: ___________________________________________

Address: ___________________________________________

City/State/Zip: ___________________________________________

Telephone: _____________________

Email Address: _____________________

All responses and/or questions should be directed to (check one or both):

Property Owner Agent

c. Form to be accompanied by a 22”x34” site plan with driveway locations indicating


the extent of the access which the private property has or will have to other
public streets.
d. Forms may be submitted at any time between Preliminary Plat submittal and
Final Site Plan Permitting
e. Results of PWE review/analysis will result in “Interpose no objection to
Permitting” or “Requires submittal and approval of additional information prior to
Permitting”

A-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON
FORM A
ACCESS MANAGEMENT
DATA SUMMARY

SITE INFORMATION: Location Map

_____________________________________________
Street Address (Primary Access):

_____________________________________________

_____________________________________________
Legal Description (if no street address)

_______________ _____________
Key Map Page No. Zip Code

The dimensions of the private property, and the type and location of improvements thereon or
to be placed thereon:

Tract Size (Sq Ft or Acres): __________________________

Current Land Use (include # of units, square footage of improvements, etc.)

________________________________________________________________________________
Current Trip Generation Rates (Based on ITE Trip Generation Handbook or COH approved local rate)

ITE Land Use Classification:_______________AM Trip Rate: ___________ PM Trip


Rate:__________
(Code & Description)

AM Peak Hour Trip Rate: ______PM Peak Hour Trip Rate: ________ Average DailyTraffic:__________
(Provide Trip Generation supporting documentation as applicable.)

The proposed use to be made of the private property:


(include proposed # of units, square footage of improvements, etc.)

____________________________________________________________________________________

Proposed Trip Generation Rates (Based on ITE Trip Generation Handbook or COH approved local
rate)

ITE Land Use Classification:_______________AM Trip Rate: ___________ PM Trip


Rate:__________
(Code & Description)

AM Peak Hour Trip Rate:______PM Peak Hour Trip Rate: _______ Average Daily Traffic:________
(Provide Trip Generation supporting documentation as applicable)
A-2
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON
FORM B
ACCESS MANAGEMENT
DATA SUMMARY

Dimensions and type of construction of the street and the nature and volumes of traffic on the
street on which the private property abuts:

Primary Adjacent Street: Name:


_______________________________________________________

Right of Way Width: ____________ No. of Lanes: ___________ Speed Limit:


__________________

Street Type/Material: ____________________ Pavement Width: _______________

Weekday Traffic Count


AM Peak Hour: ______________PM Peak Hour: _____________Average Daily Traffic:
_____________

Secondary Adjacent Street: Name:


_____________________________________________________

Right of Way Width: ____________ No. of Lanes: ___________ Speed Limit:


__________________

Street Type/Material: ____________________ Pavement Width: _______________

Weekday Traffic Count


AM Peak Hour: ______________PM Peak Hour: _____________Average Daily Traffic: ____________

Other Adjacent Street(s) if applicable: Name:____________________________________________

Right of Way Width: ____________ No. of Lanes: __________ Speed Limit: __________________

Street Type/Material: ____________________ Pavement Width: _______________

Weekday Traffic Count


AM Peak Hour: ______________PM Peak Hour: _____________Average Daily Traffic: _________

This space reserved for use by City of Houston.

B-1
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

C. TRAFFIC IMPACT ANALYSIS GUIDELINES (TIA)

1. General

a. Authorization to Perform a TIA

A TIA shall be prepared by an individual, group, firm, or corporation having


demonstrated professional emphasis and experience in traffic engineering, and the
preparation of similar analysis, hereinafter referred to as the “Analysis Engineer”.
The TIA document shall bear the seal and signature of a Texas Licensed
Professional Engineer specializing in the branch of civil engineering. The
responsibility for assessing the traffic impacts associated with a proposed
development/redevelopment, hereinafter referred to as the “Development,” rests
with the Applicant and the Analysis Engineer, while the City shall serve as the
review and approval authority.

b. Purpose and Intent of TIA Guidelines

The purpose of the TIA is to identify the adequacy of the existing street right of
way to accommodate any changes in trips generated from a proposed
development/redevelopment. If impacts are identified, potential mitigation
measures (on-site or off-site) can be proposed and evaluated. Both the City and
Applicant share in the responsibility to consider all mitigation measures to solve
current and future traffic problems. In addition, the traffic impact analysis is will
be used to make a determination as to whether driveway(s) being considered are
necessary to provide reasonable access to the private property consistent with the
safety and convenience of the public.

c. Goals of a TIA Completed Within the City of Houston

(1) To identify any and all potential adverse traffic impacts to the existing area
street system, the surrounding community and to additional proposed
developments.
(2) To identify transportation improvements with an aim to mitigate identified
adverse traffic impacts to mobility within the study area/analysis area.
(3) To assist public and private sector entities in identifying and resolving issues
related to the location of driveways, median openings, turn lanes, traffic
signals, and other transportation facilities.

d. Document Limitations

While this section (15.04) contains guidelines and requirements necessary to


complete a TIA for the City, the City does not intend this section to be a sole
reference for the preparation of a TIA. For more specific information regarding
the various aspects of TIA preparation, the City suggests that the reader obtain

15-6
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

and refer to the Institute of Transportation Engineer’s (ITE) current edition of


Transportation Impact Analyses for Site Development (An ITE Proposed
Recommended Practice).

2. The Traffic Impact Analysis Process

a. A TIA determines traffic impacts of a development/redevelopment on the


surrounding street system. The City will use this information to assist in
establishing immediate transportation infrastructure needs and potential
transportation improvements.

b. It is a goal of the City that these guidelines will allow for the maximization of
efficiency and safety associated with area development/redevelopment. The City
emphasizes that the TIA process can begin when the Applicant initiates
development planning (i.e. prior to plat preparation).

c. If a TIA is required or the applicant chooses to prepare a TIA, the completed TIA
may be submitted prior to or in conjunction with preliminary reserve subdivision
plat application.

d. Prior to submitting an application for development platting or a building permit


the Applicant may be required to submit a revised TIA and obtain approval by the
City if any changes have been made to the development (site plan) or original TIA
assumptions related to:
(1) Land-use (revisions required only for an increase in trips),
(2) Increase in the trip generation variable(s) (revisions required only for an
increase in trips),
(3) Intersection and street design, and
(4) Access connections placement and design assumptions.

3. The Proposal of Scope and Initial Trip Generation Estimate

a. Using proposed development or redevelopment attributes (type, size, etc.),


determine a corresponding traffic impact category for the Development by
calculating the highest number of estimated new peak hour trips generated for an
adjacent street (See Table 15.04.01).

Table 15.4.01 Traffic Impact Categories


Site Traffic Thresholds
Traffic Impact Category New Peak Hour Trips (PHT)
on Adjacent Street
Category I PHT < 100
Category II 100 to 499
Category III 500 to 999
Category IV PHT > 1000

15-7
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

b. The City requires that the Analysis Engineer generate site traffic using the
methodologies found in the current edition of the ITE publication, Trip
Generation. This includes following the “Recommended Procedure for Estimating
Trip Generation”, as shown in Figure 15.4.02.

1. Compatible with ITE Land


No Use Code?
Yes
Collect Local Data and Establish Local Rate (refer to Chapter 4)

2. Size within Data Extremes?


No
Yes
3. Number of Data Points
1 or 2
(encourage) 3-5
3-5 6+

4. Regression Equation? Use Regression Equation

Yes
No Yes
5. Standard Deviation ≤ 110 %? 7. 20 or More Data Points
No (Std Dev / Average Rate ≤ 1.1?)
Yes No

6. Data Cluster Okay? (rate line


No within cluster of data points?) 8A. R2 ≥ 0.75? And 8B. Std Dev ≤ 110% And
Within Cluster? within Cluster?
Yes

Use Weighted Average Rate


If 8A is yes & 8B is yes Choose Line at Cluster (best fits)

If 8A is yes & 8B is no Use Regression Equation


Note: if there are no data points near the site size, If 8A is no & 8B is yes Use Weighted Average Rate
but there are good matches at somewhat smaller
and larger sizes, assume the answer is yes Collect Local Data (exception: if
If 8A is no & 8B is no
Rate line or Eq line passes through
data cluster at the site size, use
whichever line that is appropriate)

Figure 15.4.02 Recommended Procedure for Estimating Trip Generation

c. Using the resulting traffic impact category and the Boundaries and Horizons
Guidelines in Table 15.04.02, the Analysis Engineer shall prepare and submit to
the City Engineer a proposal of scope for the TIA.

d. It is also a goal of the proposal of scope to minimize deliverables. It is mandatory


that, regardless of traffic impact category (II, III, or IV), the Analysis Engineer
holds a preliminary scoping meeting with the City Traffic Engineer.

e. An approved proposal of scope ensures that the submittal of a TIA will allow the
City to evaluate the overall traffic impact of the development on area
transportation infrastructure.

15-8
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

4. Preparing the TIA

The TIA shall be prepared according to the requirements detailed in the sections titled
TIA Submission Requirements and Technical Notes (see Figure 15.04.03).

Horizon General
Table 15.04.02 Boundaries and Horizons Guidelines
Category Category Category Category
Requirements
I II III IV
Access Management Data Summary Form X X X X
General

Meeting with the City Traffic Engineer X X X


Proposal of Scope X X X

Opening Year X X X
Horizon

Full Build-Out Year X X

½ or 1 Mile
Analysis Area (From boundaries of development) ¼ Mile ½ Mile
(1)
All Site Access Driveways X X X
Limits

All Site Access Private Street Intersections X X X

All Adjacent Signalized Intersections X X X

All Adjacent Major Unsignalized Intersections X X X

All Analysis Area Signalized Intersections X X

All Analysis Area Major Unsignalized


X X
Intersections

(1) Include critical intersections

5. TIA Submission and Review

a. All TIA submittals should be addressed to the Office of the City Engineer. Paper
copies should be submitted through the Office of the City Engineer, first floor of
611 Walker, Houston, TX. Electronic copies should be emailed directly to the
Office of the City Engineer.

b. The Applicant shall submit to the City two (2) paper copies and one electronic
copy. In addition, one electronic version of the TIA appendix is required (paper
copies of the appendix are not necessary unless requested by the City).

c. The City will make an initial review of the TIA to determine if the Analysis
Engineer completed the TIA in accordance with the technical requirements and
within the submission requirements of the analysis as outlined in this manual or as
established at the preliminary scoping meeting or proposal of scope. If the City

15-9
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

finds deviations from the technical requirements and/or the submission


requirements of the study, the City will terminate the initial review until the
Analysis Engineer has addressed said deficiencies. At such a time when the City
identifies deficiencies, the City will develop a notice of deficiencies and submit
the notice to the Analysis Engineer and Applicant. Submittal should include, if
available, electronic copies of traffic counts and other collected data (i.e.,
queuing, delay studies, etc.) as well as any traffic analysis models used and
referenced in the TIA.

Traffic
Impact
Determination

Determine Boundaries
Requirements And
Horizons

Prepare
Proposal Submit for
Of Scope Review

Trip
Existing Background Project
Generation &
Conditions Conditions Conditions
Distribution

Traffic
Analysis

Determine
Mitigation
Measures

Improvements
Analysis

Final Report
Preparation
City-
Review

Figure 15.04.03 Traffic Impact Analysis Preparation Overview

15-10
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

d. All TIA submittals should include either an interim seal or a final seal, which is
signed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas

e. Upon the Applicant submitting a final TIA that meets the technical and
submission requirements established in this document or at the preliminary
scoping meeting or proposal of scope, the City will conduct a final review of the
TIA. If during the course of the final review the City needs additional
information, the City will provide the Analysis Engineer and Applicant a written
request for addendum.

f. Following the City’s completion of the final review, the City will provide to the
Analysis Engineer and Applicant written objection to the findings or adequacy of
the proposed mitigation measures to address impacts. If no objections are noted,
the City will interpose no objection to permitting for the proposed development.
If the Applicant disagrees with the objections made by the City, the Applicant
may write an appeal to the Director of Public Works.

6. Mitigation Measures Requirements.

a. The TIA shall have identified significant adverse traffic impacts in order to trigger
the need for mitigation. The need for mitigation is determined by using the
qualitative measure Level-of-Service (LOS). The threshold of significance for
transportation facilities on the area street system is LOS D. Figure 15.04.04
provides a visual decision tree regarding mitigation and LOS thresholds.

b. Transit Corridor Streets – Chapter 42 of the City of Houston Code of Ordinances


(Subdivisions, Developments and Platting) and this Infrastructure Design Manual
provide planning rules and design standards to achieve multi-modal transportation
corridors along designated Transit Streets.

Where a TIA for proposed development along a transit street is required by this
chapter, it shall include trip generation estimates in accordance with guidelines
presented in Figure 15.4.02. The TIA shall include a summary of estimated trips
by applicable transportation categories. Transportation categories may include
automobile, truck, transit, bicycle and pedestrian. Trip allocations shall be
supported by documentation including data from local planning agencies, records
of actual ridership from local transit agencies, statistical data from similar projects
in other locations, standards from professional organizations, and other applicable
resources. Where the existing or background conditions are LOS E or F and
existing physical conditions limit available mitigation measures, the Analysis
Engineer shall meet with the City Engineer to review probable community
impacts and possible mitigation measures.

15-11
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

c. The Mitigation Decision Tree is shown in Figure 15.04.04 below. The chart is
color coded. Purple indicates acceptable levels of service A-D; yellow indicates
marginal level of service E; and red indicates unacceptable level of service F. The
Tree components are defined as follows:
(1) Existing – represents the performance of the existing street network
(2) Background – represents the performance of the street network for a future
year, “no build” scenario. Includes future volumes without the proposed
development and also includes any future improvements to the street network
that are already programmed, regardless of whether the proposed development
is built.
(3) Projected – represents the performance of the street network for a future year,
“build scenario”, which represents the future street volumes with the proposed
development in place. Other than changes in traffic volumes, the “Projected”
scenario includes the same street network conditions as the “Background”
scenario. Proposed signal retiming resulting from the proposed development
should be included in the “Mitigation” scenario.
(4) Mitigation – represents the performance of the future street network with the
proposed development and with proposed mitigations resulting from the
proposed development. Mitigation action is required for all conditions
indicated in this row of the Decision Tree.

(5) LOS E and LOS F


(a) For areas in the street system where the current LOS is E, the baseline
LOS must be maintained or improved after development. For example, if
the LOS prior to development is E, then once the development is in place.
The LOS must be at least E.

(b) For areas in the street system where the current LOS is F, the traffic
impacts of the development on the streets and intersection within the
analysis area shall be mitigated such that the LOS criteria do not
deteriorate beyond Background Conditions. The City Engineer must
approve any deterioration beyond the Background Conditions.

15-12
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

EXISTING

A-D E F
BACKGROUND

A-D E F E F F
PROJECTED

A-D E F E F F E F F F
MITIGATION

D D E F E F F

Figure 15.04.04 Mitigation Decision Tree

d. Threshold of significance occurs when an adverse traffic impact exceeds a certain


standard. The LOS standards for City street facilities are based upon measures of
effectiveness (MOEs). These MOEs describe the measures best suited for
analyzing capacity of City street facilities.

e. Methodology for computing each type of MOE and determining corresponding


LOS can be found in the Highway Capacity Manual (HCM).

f. Traffic mitigation strategies may include those listed in section 15.04.C.7 IX.

g. Traffic Signal Retiming as a Mitigation Measure

Traffic signal retiming is not considered an acceptable mitigation measure unless


it is first approved by the City of Houston Transtar. Typically, an individual
intersection cannot be re-optimized in the future if it is a part of coordinated street
network. This may only be possible if the entire street network is re-timed to
allow for system wide signal progression. Proposed signal retiming resulting from
the proposed development should be included in the “Mitigation” scenario.

7. Traffic Impact Analysis Submission Requirements

15-13
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

a. The Analysis Engineer must identify all of the required data and information in
the appropriate sections of the report.

b. Text contained in the document shall be comprehensive and complete.

c. The report shall be typed and bound.

d. The report shall contain a table of contents, lists of figures and list of tables. A
typical TIA report outline is shown in the following sections.

I. Executive Summary
(a) Site Location & Analysis Area
(b) Development Description
(c) Conclusions
(d) Recommendations

II. Introduction
(a) A statement about the purpose and objectives of the analysis.
(b) A description of the existing and expected land use and intensity.
(1) If residential, number and type of dwelling units.
(2) If commercial or industrial, square footage and type.
(3) If redevelopment, what is the expected trip generation differential
(c) A vicinity map identifying major industrial and site access intersections and other
approved projects near the development.
(d) A site plan for the development.
(e) A description of development phasing and estimate year each phase will begin
and end.

III. Area Conditions


(a) A description of the analysis area.
(b) A description of existing and future land uses within the analysis area. The
description should include current land use, densities and occupancy, anticipated
development, undeveloped properties, and current master plans.
(1) If residential, number and type of dwelling units.
(2) If commercial or industrial, square footage and type.
(c) A combination of narratives, tables and figures detailing area street system
characteristics within the analysis area including:
(1) Programmed street improvements in the area (City of Houston 5 year
Capital Improvement Plan)
(2) Additional streets that may be impacted
(3) Functional Street Classifications
(4) Posted Speed Limits
(5) Distance, and alignments from existing streets, driveways, and/or median
openings to development access (need to assess Access Management
Standards)

15-14
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(6) Traffic control devices (traffic signals and Stop signs)


(7) Signal locations and timings (offsets need to be shown if in coordination)
(8) Intersection layout, lane usage, and street configuration
(9) Street right-of-way widths
(10) Lane widths
(11) Current traffic volumes within the past 1 year to have been captured on a
typical Tuesday, Wednesday, or Thursday for all streets in the analysis.
Any traffic volumes older than 1 year may not be acceptable and will need
to be justified. The Analysis Engineer should also make every reasonable
effort to count traffic that accurately reflects a true “peak period’ for the
area, which includes any potential seasonal variations (i.e. schools,
churches, etc.). Depending on the type of development, it may also be
necessary to capture volumes on a typical weekend.
i. 24 hour counts at major intersection and site access intersections.
ii. Turning movement counts (Peak Hours).
(12) Pedestrians and Bikes (If Applicable)
i. Facilities
ii. Volumes
(13) Transit Service (If Applicable)
i. Major Transit Stops
ii. Ridership (where applicable/when available)
iii. Routes and Service Intervals
(14) Crash Analysis (if Applicable) over the past 3 years, including number
and types of crashes as well as severity of injuries.
(15) Existing sight distances – Intersection and stopping sight distances,
vertical and horizontal clearances. Refer to Chapter 10, Section
10.06.B.3. Intersection Sight Distance.

IV. Required Table(s)


(a) Twenty-four hour approach volumes at major and site access intersections.
(b) Peak Hour approach volumes at major and site access intersections

V. Required Figure(s)
(a) Major and site access intersection lane configuration diagrams with existing
Twenty-four hour approach volumes. Preferably overlaid onto aerial
photography.
(b) Major and site access intersection lane configuration diagrams with existing AM
and PM peak hour turning movement volumes. Preferably overlaid onto aerial
photography.
(c) The Analysis Engineer may also use photographs (identifying location from where
it was taken as well as the date and time stamp) to document existing conditions.

VI. Projected Traffic


(a) Sufficient details of calculations so that all calculations can be verified.

15-15
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(b) Site generated traffic volumes (24-hour and peak periods) by corresponding
development phase or year.
(c) Trip Generation - List of trip generation rates and/or sources of rates used for the
study.
(d) Trip Distribution and Assignment - The gravity model or other acceptable trip
distribution model used to estimate trip distribution. The Analysis Engineer can
complete this task either manually or with applicable computer models.
(1) Background traffic volumes (24-hour and peak periods) by corresponding
development phase or year.
(e) Traffic Volumes should account for all approved developments in the analysis
area as well as area growth beyond the analysis area. Contact the City for
information about surrounding developments.
(1) Pass-by and diverted traffic volume reduction rates, if applicable.
(2) Pedestrian, bicycle and transit reduction rates, and supporting evidence, if
applicable.
(3) Internal capture reduction rates, if applicable.
(4) Total project traffic volumes (24-hour and peak periods) by corresponding
development phase or year. Future traffic as may be required for a
development with multiple phases should also be included.
(f) Required Table(s)
(1) Pass-by trip, internal capture, pedestrian, bicycles, and transit reduction
rates used, if applicable.
(2) Twenty-Four hour approach volumes for background, pass-by, site generated,
and total project traffic conditions at major and site access intersections and
any additional transportation facilities specified by the City.
(3) Peak Hour approach volumes for background, pass-by, site generated, and
total project traffic conditions at major and site access intersections and any
additional transportation facilities specified by the City.
(g) Required Figure(s)
(1) Twenty-Four hour, and peak hour approach volumes for background, pass-by,
site generated, and total project traffic conditions overlaid onto major and
site access intersections lane configuration diagrams. Preferably overlaid
onto aerial photography.
(2) Peak hour turning movement volumes for background, pass-by, site
generated, and total project traffic conditions overlaid onto major and site
access intersections lane configuration diagrams. Preferably overlaid onto
aerial photography.
(3) Distribution and assignment rates for pass-by and site generated traffic
volumes overlaid onto major and site access intersections lane configuration
diagrams. Preferably overlaid onto aerial photography.

VII. Traffic Analysis


Analyze existing, background and project Traffic Conditions LOS and Delay at all
major and site access intersections and determine MOEs of any additional

15-16
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

transportation facilities within the analysis area as necessary or as specified by the


City.
(a) Analysis must utilize existing traffic volumes.
(b) Analysis must utilize total projected traffic volumes which include site generated
traffic and the background traffic to complete analyses for the required study
limits and horizons as they correspond to the predetermined TIA category.
(c) Analysis may be prepared manually or by using various software programs such
as Highway Capacity Software, Synchro or as approved by the City.
(d) Analysis must utilize the capacity analysis methodology found in the current
edition of the Highway Capacity Manual, or control delay calculations from
Synchro or other software as approved by the City, and/or delay calculations
from micro-simulation of the complete street network (no individual intersections)
to determine LOS.
(e) Determination of necessary or specified MOEs should be completed using state-
of-the-practice engineering methods.
(f) In addition to LOS and delay, the Analysis Engineer should identify critical
movements regarding capacity and potential locations of queue spillback.
(g) The Analysis Engineer should perform a signal warrant analysis for unsignalized
intersections (engineering judgment) using the signal warrant guidelines.
Additionally, as part of the improvements analysis the Analysis Engineer should
analyze any unsignalized intersections warranting a signal as a signalized
intersection and discuss within the TIA report.
(h) Tables of existing, background and project traffic conditions LOS and delay for
each major and site access intersection and MOEs for any additional
transportation facilities specified by the City, include critical movements and
queue spillbacks.

VIII. Additional Information (If Applicable)


(a) Site circulation and off-site parking requirements.
(b) Potential parking impact to adjacent neighborhoods and neighborhood parking
(c) Evaluation of potential need for traffic calming including bulb out, chicanes,
roundabouts, or those elements found in Section 15.19 of this chapter.
(d) Others (If Applicable)
(1) Crash Analysis
(2) Traffic control needs
(3) Transit
(4) Pedestrian and bicycle access
(5) Delivery and service vehicles
(6) Transportation demand management.

IX. Transportation Improvements Analysis (Mitigation Measures)


(a) A description and justification of needed transportation improvements to
accommodate project traffic conditions
(b) LOS and Delay evaluation and comparison including review of critical
movements and queue spillbacks

15-17
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(c) MOE comparison for any additional transportation facilities specified by the City
(d) Table(s)
(1) LOS and Delay comparisons for improvements including critical movements
and queue spillback
(2) MOE comparisons for any additional transportation facilities improvements
(e) Figure(s)
(1) Concept schematics of improvements including corresponding LOS and
Delay values.

X. Site Improvement Analysis


(a) A description of site circulation and recommendations for improvement.
(b) A description of on-site parking and recommendations for improvement including
shared parking, if applicable
(c) A description of expected delivery and service vehicle operation and facility use
and recommendations for improvement.
(d) A description of expected site passenger loading characteristics and
recommendations for improvement.
(e) A description of adherence to related access management concepts as can be
found in the City’s set of Access Management Standards including driveway
design, access spacing, and turning movement treatments.

XI. Conclusions and Recommendations


(a) Traffic Impacts
(b) Adjacent transportation improvements for each horizon year addressing, at a
minimum, the following
(1) Traffic control device(s) (modification or installation)
(2) Additional capacity (left, right, or through lanes)
(3) Need for acceleration or deceleration lanes
(4) Critical movements
(5) Length of storage bays
(6) Implementation schedule
(c) Off site transportation improvements
(1) Modification to existing traffic control device(s)
(2) Additional traffic control device(s)
(3) Additional capacity at major intersections
(4) Additional street capacity
(5) Other
(d) Site transportation improvements
(1) Access Management
(2) Site circulation and parking
(e) Mitigation Measures
(1) The TIA report shall identify the mitigation measures needed as a result of
any traffic impacts of the proposed development or redevelopment. The TIA
report should also identify who or what exactly caused the need for each
mitigation measure. This information will be used when the Applicant meets

15-18
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

with the City Engineer about the implementation and cost appropriations for
mitigations measures.

XII. Appendices
Appendices may be included as an attached CD having individual electronic file
folders for each appendix and appropriately titled Adobe PDF files.
(a) Basic Trip Generation Worksheet
(b) Capacity Analysis Worksheets or Modeling Software Output
(c) Traffic Volumes (24-hour and peak hour turning movement counts)
(d) Selected Photographs

D. TECHNICAL NOTES

1. Background Trip Determination


Background or non-site traffic forecasts are necessary to determine the impact of the
development in horizon years such as the projected year of opening, year of full
build-out and five years after full build-out. Background traffic consists of all trips
that do not begin or end in the analysis area and all attraction and production trips
from existing development within the analysis area. Trips generated from existing
development within the analysis area are important as the proposed development may
influence existing traffic patterns and potentially generate new trips for existing
developments. Background traffic volumes should also include trips generated from
other proposed developments within the analysis area. The Analysis Engineer should
check with the City to ensure that all approved developments have been included in
background traffic determination.

2. Methodologies for Background Traffic Determination

a. There are three basic methodologies used to determine background traffic


volumes: build-out, area transportation planning, and trending. Each of these
methodologies has strengths and weaknesses. Some methods may be more
appropriate depending on the category of the Development. The Analysis
Engineer may use any of the three aforementioned methods to determine
background traffic volumes. The City anticipates that the majority of background
traffic calculations will be completed using trending methods. For this reason, the
City provides the following information on trending.

b. Trending or the use of growth rates is a common method used to generate


background traffic. This method is particularly useful for smaller developments
and studies having shorter horizon periods (5 to 10 years). City of Houston traffic
volumes have typically grown between one and two percent per year. Although
these growth rates are typical for the whole of the City, there are some areas that
may have higher and lower rates of growth. The Analysis Engineer may find
higher growth rates in outlying areas of the City having lower development
density, and lower growth rates in older more mature areas of the City that have

15-19
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

little or no year-to-year changes in traffic. In general, the City of Houston


experiences a growth rate of one percent for all trending analyses. It is a
requirement and the responsibility of the Analysis Engineer to apply appropriate
growth rates as they correspond to different areas of the city. The Analysis
Engineer should provide and justify an expected area growth rate in the proposal
of scope for approval by the City.

3. Site Trip Generation

The City requires that the Analysis Engineer generate site traffic using the
methodologies found in the current edition of the ITE publication, Trip Generation
Handbook. This includes following the “Recommended Procedure for Estimating
Trip Generation”, as shown in Figure 15.04.02. The ITE publication suggests using
rates from local studies as a preferred method for generating site traffic. If the
Analysis Engineer utilizes local studies to determine appropriate rates, it is a
requirement and the responsibility of the Analysis Engineer to reference these studies
in the TIA report. In addition, the Analysis Engineer must make available copies of
the referenced studies if requested by the City. If local rates are not available, the
Analysis Engineer shall use equations and rates from the current edition of the ITE
Trip Generation report as long as it follows the ITE Recommended Procedure, as
shown in Figure 15.04.02. Otherwise, Analysis Engineer should consult with the City
and local data may need to be collected

4. Pass-by Trips / Internal Capture

a. The City Traffic Engineer shall approve all pass-by and internal capture reduction
for use in the TIA.

b. The added pass-by trip will have little impact on through movement traffic
operations or be part of a potential change in travel demand requiring adjacent
transportation infrastructure improvements. However, the City recognizes that
pass-by trips can affect left- and right- turning movement frequency and may
require installation of turn lanes or other forms of mitigation (i.e., exclusive
phasing, timing optimization, capacity increase). The Analysis Engineer should
redistribute pass-by trips from the through movement to the appropriate left- or
right- turning movement for analysis purposes. The Analysis Engineer should
provide and justify an expected reduction rate for pass-by trips in the proposal of
scope for approval by the City.

c. Development access connections should still carry pass-by trips and the Analysis
Engineer should consider those trips in calculating the total number of trips
generated by the proposed development and for necessary adjacent street
improvements due to these trips. The City also recommends that the Analysis
Engineer account for pass-by trips in the trip assignment step to ensure
appropriate left and right turning movement volumes as these added turning

15-20
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

vehicles may require the need for the installation of new or additional storage at
existing left- and right-turn lanes.

d. Internal capture is the application of a percent reduction in generated trips


(driveway trips) and is typically applicable to projects such as shopping centers
with out-lots.

5. Generating Trips for Redevelopment

a. For proposed redevelopment, the City allows the Analysis Engineer to subtract
trips generated by the existing development from those the new development will
generate.

b. If an Applicant proposes changes to only a portion of an existing development,


the City allows the Analysis Engineer to subtract any trips associated with that
portion of the existing development from the trip that the proposed redevelopment
will generate.

6. Site Trip Distribution and Assignment

a. Site traffic distribution and assignment are very subjective tasks and requires the
Analysis Engineer to exercise engineering judgment and to call on past
experiences in transportation planning.

b. Trip Distribution
(1) Trip distribution efforts, in general, take into consideration the Development
as a whole. Determining how generated traffic will access the proposed
development can vary greatly and depends on several factors:
(a) Type of development
(b) Size of the development
(c) Where the development will draw or attract traffic from
(d) Competing developments in the area
(e) Surrounding land uses
(f) Condition and capacity of the surrounding street system
(2) The City recommends the Analysis Engineer refer to, or utilize previously
determined trip distribution models, planning software, or other recognized
and substantiated methods to distribute traffic.
(3) It is a requirement and the responsibility of the Analysis Engineer to document
the methodologies or references utilized in completing the task of trip
distribution in the TIA report. The Analysis Engineer will also be responsible
to provide copies of referenced studies or models if requested by the City.

7. Trip Assignment

15-21
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Assigning trips determines the amount of traffic on routes within the street network
and analysis area. The Analysis Engineer should assign trips after considering
several area and street network characteristics such as logical routings, left-turn
movements at unsignalized intersections and access connections, available capacity
and existing travel times. The Analysis Engineer should consider traffic conditions
for each horizon year and adjust trip assignments accordingly. The Analysis Engineer
may also find it necessary to prepare different sets of trip assignments for site
generated trips. This may especially be useful if there are a significant number of
pass-by trips. It is a requirement and the responsibility of the Analysis Engineer to
detail and explain assumptions in the narrative portion of the TIA report.

8. Traffic Analysis

a. Capacity analyses shall be performed on the transportation facilities within the


determined analysis area. The Analysis Engineer shall use the methodology of
the HCM to complete any capacity analysis. The analyses may be prepared
manually or by using various available software programs such as HCS, Synchro,
or as approved by the City. In addition to capacity analyses, the Analysis
Engineer should consider other factors including safety, circulation, traffic control
needs, transit, neighborhood impacts, pedestrian and bicycle access, delivery and
service vehicles and transportation demand management.

b. For each analysis horizon, the Analysis Engineer shall utilize the total project
traffic volume which includes site generated traffic and the background traffic.
Background traffic shall include traffic from other proposed developments within
the analysis area and horizon. The Analysis Engineer shall also complete
capacity analyses for existing and background conditions in order to provide LOS
comparisons.

c. The analysis and site plan of the Development are an iterative process necessary
for each horizon year. The purpose is to show the relationship between the site,
its circulation, and plan along with the existing area street system. Accomplishing
this allows the Analysis Engineer to better determine deficiencies and develop
alternatives for consideration. The Analysis Engineer should define and identify
impacts, deficiencies, and need for improvement. The analysis of existing
conditions is essential in order to determine pre-development deficiencies and
need for improvements.

d. The Analysis Engineer shall tabulate and report LOS and Delay for the
transportation facilities within the determined analysis area. The Analysis
Engineer should tabulate overall intersection LOS and delay for each approach
and individual movements. The City recognizes that left turning movements and
in many cases, the approach LOS may be less than desirable at stop-controlled
facilities. Intersection capacity analysis shall include analysis of queue spillbacks
and capacity of left and right turn lanes. The LOS for turning movements at all

15-22
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

access connections (driveways and turning lanes) at the project site shall also be
analyzed.

e. If the Applicant is proposing a traffic signal at an intersection or access


connections, the Analysis Engineer shall use the warranting process prescribed by
the City’s Signal Engineering Section Design Guidelines.

f. All capacity analysis worksheets and modeling software outputs for the existing
conditions and horizon years shall be included in the TIA report as an appendix.
The City may also require the actual model to be submitted in electronic form.

9. Site Access and Off-Site Improvements

a. The Analysis Engineer should identify needs and deficiencies using the
previously prepared analyses. In addition the Analysis Engineer should develop
alternatives to address these needs and should address both on- and off-site
improvements, if applicable.

b. Mitigation measures can include, but are not limited to, median openings, turn
lanes, traffic calming and traffic signals. The Analysis Engineer shall analyze
proposed mitigation measures for capacity and other factors. The Analysis
Engineer shall base capacity improvements on the LOS.

10. Previously Proposed Transportation Improvements

The Analysis Engineer can factor proposed network improvements into the analysis
and can use them as mitigation measures. For example, if the Applicant schedules a
Development to open in three years, and the City has a capital project that will widen
the street before that time, the Analysis Engineer can consider the proposed capital
improvement in the analysis.

11. Phased Developments

a. Phased Developments often present a challenge for the Applicant. In many cases,
Phase I of the development is well defined while additional phases are vague and
may change with market conditions.

b. It is acceptable to the City for an Applicant to submit a TIA for all phases of the
Development including proposed improvements at the start of a project.
However, if future phases of the Development change, generating more traffic
than what the Applicant had previously submitted to the City, it will be necessary
for an Analysis Engineer to update the existing TIA or prepare a new one. If the
Applicant only submits to the City the first phase of the Development, the
Applicant should be aware that conditions may change potentially requiring
additional on- and off-site improvements. If a Development is to be completed in

15-23
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

phases, the TIA can also propose phasing of mitigation. However, the Analysis
Engineer must analyze any mitigation measures proposed for the appropriate
horizon year.

12. On-Site Planning

a. An integral component of any TIA should include basic site planning. This
includes the identification of access connections, internal circulation, service and
delivery access connections and service bays including the use of turning
templates as appropriate, and the identification of optimal building locations.

b. Access connections operate as intersections and the City treats them as such.
They should have an appropriate number of lanes, adequate storage, pedestrian
facilities and appropriate signing and pavement markings. Adequate storage for a
larger Development’s access connections is often a concern, and if not designed
properly, will operate inefficiently creating the potential for traffic to back up
onto the street system. Joint access between adjoining properties is desirable;
particularly where street frontages are short or internal volumes will be low.
Driveways should be located near the property line if possible or the Applicant
should make cross access agreements with adjoining property owners.

c. On-site circulation and street design should be consistent with off-site streets.
The area street system has shaped driver behavior and expectations; violating
these expectations provides potential for safety problems.

d. This should extend to the use of Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices (TxMUTCD) approved signs and pavement markings as well. Site
access connections shall conform to City of Houston Access Management
Standards and the Applicant and the Analysis Engineer should consider the
following principles:
(1) Locating proposed traffic signals to provide for progression along the
intersecting street.
(2) Providing the minimum number of access connections that can adequately
serve all anticipated traffic traveling to the site.
(3) Providing adequate capacity/storage at access connections to ensure that
traffic accessing the site does not spill back onto adjacent streets.
(4) Intersecting two-way driveways with streets as close to perpendicular as
possible.
(5) Providing adequate capacity/storage at internal intersections, especially those
adjacent to public street access connections, to ensure that traffic within the
site does not spill back onto adjacent streets.
(6) Providing adequate sight distance and appropriate safety measures at all
access connections and internal intersections.

15-24
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(7) Locate site driveways directly across from existing public streets, driveways
or existing median break locations, i.e., avoid offset driveways or access
connections.
e. The Analysis Engineer should base storage lengths at access connections on the
City of Houston Design Manual and Access Management Standards. For smaller
developments, the Analysis Engineer should design parking and access
connections to allow vehicles to align themselves perpendicularly to the adjacent
street system. For larger developments, the Analysis Engineer should provide
adequate storage to ensure that exiting traffic does not hinder internal circulation.

15.05 RESERVED FOR TRAFFIC VOLUMES

15.06 RESERVED FOR SCHOOL ZONE POLICIES

15.07 RESERVED FOR STREET EXTENSIONS.

15.08 ACCESS MANAGEMENT STANDARDS

A. APPLICABILITY
1. The Access Management Standards contained in this section are applicable to each
development, all or a portion, which is located within the defined corporate city limits
of the City of Houston, Texas.

2. The requirements contained within this section are design standards and will serve as
a basis for development plat approvals and building permits. These standards should
be used in conjunction with the Houston City Code of Ordinances and other
requirements set forth in the Infrastructure Design Manual.

3. Requirements for Access Management Design Techniques (additional references/


resources are available in Chapter 40 – Streets and Sidewalks of the City of Houston
Municipal Code of Ordinances and the Houston Amendments to the 2003
International Building Code;
http://www.municode.com/resources/gateway.asp?pid=10123&sid=43 .

B. GENERAL

The overall purpose of implementing the City of Houston Access Management Standards is
to enhance the functionality of City streets. This enhancement will be accomplished through
preservation and improvement of operational efficiency and safety. "Access management” is
the systematic control of the location, spacing, design, and operation of driveways, medians,
auxiliary lanes, and intersections in order to improve the balance between access and
mobility while preserving street efficiency and safety.

C. ACCESS MANAGEMENT DESIGN

15-25
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

1. Driveways

a. Driveways and their associated openings should be located and designed to


provide reasonable access between private property and the street right of way.
The driveway should not create an unmanaged traffic hazard for drivers entering
the street or for drivers on the through street, nor negatively impact normal use of
street right of way.

b. The proper location and design of a driveway should be consistent with the safety
and convenience of the public and must take into account nature and volume of
traffic on abutting streets, dimensions and construction of abutting streets, use of
developed property, dimensions of the developed property, and type and locations
of improvements to the developed property.

c. Driveway design considers the effect of vehicles to/from developed property on


the movement of traffic and the safety of traveling public on abutting streets.

d. Driveways are based on two property classifications: single family residential and
all others.

e. Driveways to/from a property should include no more than the minimum number
to provide reasonable access between the property and abutting street.

f. Driveway width is measured at the beginning of the driveway radii tangents


within the driveway (see Figure 15.08.01). Driveway Radius is the rounded edge
of a driveway that permits easier entry and exit by turning vehicles. Design
standards for minimum driveway width and radius can be found in Table
15.08.01.

Figure 15.08.01 Driveway Radius and Width

15-26
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Table 15.08.01 Driveway Design Criteria


Single Family Residential All Others
Radius (ft) Width (ft) Radius (ft) Width (ft)
Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min
Two-Way 15 4 24 12 25 10 35 24
Joint-Access 15 4 24 12 25 10 35 24
One-Way 15 4 20 12 25 10 20 15

g. Notes on Driveway Design Criteria

(1) One-way driveways must intersect city streets between 45 and 90 degrees.
(2) Skewed, one-way drives are permitted only on one-way streets and divided
streets with no median opening.
(3) Two-way driveways must intersect city streets at approximately 90 degrees.
(4) Where situations permit, AASHTO design vehicles may be used to justify
driveway radii.
(5) No driveway radius shall encroach on abutting property or corner radius.
(6) Driveways shall not be permitted within limits of any intersection. (Design
exception shall be required for major thoroughfare locations with existing
esplanades and streets used for residential access.)
(7) For one-way driveways, the entry driveway shall precede exit driveways (in
direction of adjacent travel lane).
(8) Driveway must remain tangential for a minimum of 20 feet past the property
line.
(9) Where present or projected traffic operations indicate needs for alternative
driveway geometrics, additional consideration may be given.

2. Driveways and Loading Docks/Wells/Berths

a. Loading docks/wells/berths are not permitted for back-in loading from an adjacent
Major Thoroughfare.

b. Loading docks/wells/berths must be located on site to provide for approach and


maneuvering on-site with appropriate space to accommodate dimensions of
vehicles accessing site.

c. Loading docks/wells/berths must be located on site such that sufficient area is


available to store commercial motor vehicle, truck-tractor, trailer, or semi-trailer
or combination of such vehicles within the developed property and no part of
vehicle shall protrude over the property line or obstruct any public street or
sidewalk in whole or in part.

3. Driveway and Corner Clearance Spacing

15-27
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

a. The distance between connections (driveway-driveway and driveway-street) is


measured along the edge of traveled way from the closest edge of pavement of the
first connection to the closest edge of pavement of the second connection (see
Figure 15.08.02). Driveway spacing criteria for all areas can be found in Table
15.08.02. Non-residential driveway placement criteria for intersections is shown
in Figure 15.08.03 and Table 15.08.03.

Figure 15.08.02 Driveway Spacing

Table 15.08.02 Driveway Spacing Criteria


Between
Between Adjacent Between Side
Adjacent Street
Driveways Property Line
ROW
Spacing (Minimum dimension in ft)

Single
Family
Residential 20 20 4
All Others 20(1) 30 10
(1) 10 foot minimum between pair of one-way driveways
(2) All proposed access connections must be placed to achieve adequate intersection
sight distance for safe and efficient departure from the proposed location (comply
with AASHTO standard).

15-28
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Table 15.08.03 Non-Residential Driveway Placement Criteria (1)

A B C
Frontage (2) Number of Minimum Minimum
Driveways Driveway Offset Driveway Offset
(Primary Street) (Intersecting
Street)
Up to 170 feet 1 100 feet 60 feet
170 to 250 feet 2 100 feet 60 feet
250 to 450 feet 3 100 feet 60 feet
> 450 feet 1 additional / 100 feet 60 feet
250’ frontage
(1) Applicable to driveways designed for commercial traffic (auto, truck, and bus access).
(2) Where the development frontage is equal to or greater than the distance to first median
opening, at least one driveway will be aligned with the existing and/or future location of
the median opening.
(3) For CBD or Locations unable to comply, approval of the City Engineer required.
(4) All proposed access connections must be placed to achieve adequate intersection sight
distance for safe and efficient departure from the proposed access connection (comply
with AASHTO to standard).

15-29
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

b. Notes regarding connection spacing:

(1) A pair of one-way driveways (entry and exit) should be considered as a two-
way driveway for driveway spacing purposes.
(2) Spacing between one-way driveways requires the entry precedes the exit in the
direction off the adjacent travel lane and the one-way pair meets spacing
requirements from adjacent driveways or streets.
(3) For the special situation of multiple entry driveways placed on one-way street
and exit driveways placed on a different street, two same street driveways
should be considered as a one-way pair.
(4) Driveways on a street without a median should align with driveways on the
opposite side of the street.
(5) Driveways shall not be placed in the intersection limits.

4. Medians

a. Median design involves mainly median type, opening, and length. Installing
medians provide the potential for safer street operation, increased capacity, and
improved aesthetics.

b. Median Openings
Median openings allow vehicles to cross opposing traffic lanes at designated
locations. Requirements for median openings can be found in Chapter 10.08 of
this manual.

c. Median Lengths
The lengths of medians between openings are determined by the functional
classification of the street and the type of interruption (thoroughfare, collector,
local street, private driveway, etc.) of the adjacent openings. Requirements can be
found in Chapter 10.08 of this Manual.

5. Treatments for Turning Movements

a. Turn lanes provide a refuge area for left and right turning vehicles. Turn lanes
may be placed at intersection approaches, driveway approaches, and median
openings to remove turning vehicles from the through lanes, thus reducing
congestion and improving traffic operations, capacity, and safety.

b. Dedicated Left-Turn Lanes

(1) Left-turn lanes shall be considered in the following situations:


(a) All signalized intersection approaches along planned or existing streets
having a classification of collector or higher;
(b) All unsignalized intersections and driveways along divided streets having
a classification of collector or higher;

15-30
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(c) All unsignalized intersections and driveways along undivided streets


having a classification of thoroughfare or higher;
(d) All developments in excess of five acres located within 500 feet of the
intersection of two or more thoroughfare facilities;
(e) New public or private school construction;
(f) Shopping centers and other traffic generators with a lease space in excess
of one hundred thousand square feet;
(g) Places of worship.
(2) The use of dedicated left-turn lanes should also always be guided by a traffic
study. The use of a left-turn lane requires approval from the City Engineer.

c. Dedicated Right-Turn Lanes

The use of dedicated right-turn lanes should always be guided by a traffic study.

6. Minimum Turning Treatment Storage Length

a. Storage length, as shown in Figure 15.08.04, is an important design element that


ensures the provision of sufficient turn lane storage capacity to reduce instances
of spillback. Left- and right-turn lane storage lengths must not be less than the
minimum requirements outlined in Chapter 10.06 of this Manual.

Figure 15.08.04 Turn Lane Details

b. Calculating Required Storage Length (Single Lane)

The required storage length for both left- and right-turn lanes can be obtained
using traffic modeling software such as the latest version of the HCM Software
(HCS) or Synchro/SimTraffic. The 95th percentile queue length is a widely

15-31
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

accepted value for storage length. The following methods may be used to
determine storage length.

Signalized Storage Length


For signalized intersections, the storage length should be determined based on results from
computer analysis software.

Unsignalized Storage Length


Equation 1 is used to calculate unsignalized storage length.

L=(V/30)(2)(S) (Equation 1)
Where:
L = storage length in feet
V/30 = turning volume in a two-minute interval
2 = a factor that provides for storage of all left-turning vehicles on most cycles
S = queue storage length, in feet per vehicle

15.09 RESERVED FOR SIGN STANDARDS

15.10 RESERVED FOR PAVEMENT MARKINGS

15.11 TRAFFIC SIGNALS

15.11.01 GENERAL

A. This document presents the criteria and formats to be used in designing improvements and
preparing plans for traffic signal work in the City of Houston. It will also outline general
requirements and guidelines to be followed by the designers of traffic signals for the City of
Houston. This section is not intended to replace sound engineering judgment or the
standards of engineering practice. The designer shall also follow the guidelines published in
the Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and in documents from the Institute of
Transportation Engineers.

B. The document provides consultants with:

1. the analysis requirements for determining what improvements should be


recommended,

2. the design requirements and guidelines for ensuring uniformity in type and location of
equipment, operational features, and intersection layout; and

3. the required format of plans and contract documents to allow ease of review,
minimization of construction errors, and facilitation of maintenance.

15-32
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

15.11.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Description of Design/ Review Process

1. Solicit Information From Other Agencies

a. Determine Requirements of Other Agencies & Property Owners.


Verify with TxDOT their requirements if the intersection or street approaches fall
under their jurisdiction. If discrepancies exist between the City’s requirements
and TxDOT’s , the Consultant shall meet with the City Traffic Engineer to
reconcile any differences. If access to private property (residential, industrial, or
commercial, etc.) is involved, the Consultant shall contact the property owner
involved, determine how the access will be affected, and coordinate with the City
any differences which may exist.

b. Contact Appropriate Electrical Utility for Power Hook-up and Illumination


Requirements. The Consultant shall verify with the electric utility involved in the
project the power hook-up requirements. The Consultant shall work with the
Utility to determine the service location during design and this location shall be
indicated on the plans. The Consultant shall note who is responsible for each
component of a service hook-up, including the conduit and cable run from the
load center to the power source, the conduit riser on the power pole and the actual
splice into the power system. The responsibilities shall be clearly stated in the
project plans.

c. Contact the Railroads and Verify Their Requirements Regarding Traffic Signal
Pre-emption or Crossing of Tracks with Conduit Runs.
If railroad pre-emption is required because of proximity to an intersection, contact
should be made with the railroad’s manager of telecommunications and signals
early in the design process to determine their needs or requirements. If railroad
right-of-way must be crossed with conduit runs, the Consultant shall determine
the railroad’s requirements for conduit type, size, depth, construction methods and
restrictions.

2. Collect Engineering Data.

a. Collect all data required to develop a base map of existing conditions which can
be used for the design process and operational evaluation.

b. Topographic Features
On each approach where advance detection or street improvements are
anticipated, detailed information on topographic features should be collected for
the area within 500 feet of the intersection. Otherwise, the topographic
information is only required for the distance anticipated for the detection zone

15-33
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

setbacks and for poles, traffic signal controllers, and related underground
conduits.
(1) Widths and alignments of streets, lanes, and shoulders.
(2) Median widths and lengths.
(3) Curve radii.
(4) Tapers.
(5) Turn lanes.
(6) Driveways & sidewalks.
(7) Pavement type.
(8) Existing pavement markings and raised channelization.
(9) Grades.
(10) Sight distance obstructions.
(11) Parking conditions.
(12) Right-of-way lines and easements.
(13) Building lines.
(14) Angle of intersecting streets.
(15) Trees and shrubs.
(16) Railings and barriers.
(17) Handicapped curb ramps.
(18) Street furniture.
(19) Drainage features.
(20) Traffic signal equipment:
(a) Pole locations.
(b) Signal head locations and types.
(c) Controller cabinet location.
(d) Pull boxes (location and size), and conduits.
(e) Loop Detector locations.
(f) Service location (existing and potential).
(g) Existing signal interconnect cable and/or conduit.
(21) Existing illumination (location and type).
(22) Existing signs.
(23) Existing pavement markings
(24) Overhead utilities (horizontal and vertical clearances).
(25) Underground utilities.

Special attention should be given to obtaining a precise location of utilities. The


designer shall request utility information from all utilities within the survey area.
Field location should be requested for all utilities including traffic signal cables,
conduits and detectors. Accurate horizontal and vertical clearance information
shall be obtained for overhead utility lines including the sag of the cables between
supports.

c. Operational Data (If the Location has an Existing Traffic Signal):


(1) Phasing and timings.
(2) Signal displays.

15-34
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(3) Type of controller and cabinet.


(4) Detection methodology.
(5) Traffic Signal Communications System Features.

d. Traffic Data (If Required by the City):


(1) Counts and projected volumes (24-hour approach and turning movements in
am, pm, and noon peaks).
(2) Speed limit and speed study.
(3) Accident history and diagrams (if available).
(4) Pedestrian volume and patterns.

e. Miscellaneous Data:
(1) Bus stops and routes.
(2) Adjacent land uses.
(3) Proximity of railroad crossings.
(4) Proximity of emergency vehicle sources.
(5) Other construction in progress in the area.
(6) Adjacent street and drainage structures.

It may be possible to obtain information on existing topographic features from


existing plans or maps. This data may be used for reference, but all plan
preparation shall be based on field survey unless pre-approved by the City.
Operational data and traffic data may be available from the City but may need to
be supplemented by studies conducted by the Consultant.

3. Develop Base Map of Existing Conditions.

a. The Consultant shall develop a base map showing all the applicable data
collected. This map will be used as a base for showing all phases of the traffic
signal design work and all geometric design work.

b. Directional Orientation.
All plan sheets shall have the intersection oriented with North to the top of the
sheet or to the left of the sheet (if required to provide significantly better
utilization of space).

c. Scale.
Traffic signal plans should be drawn a 1” = 20’ scale at full size. Break lines may
be used to show advanced detection of other features away for the intersection.
Blown up details at a larger scale may be used as necessary to show areas with
numerous conflicts or many items to be shown in a compact area.

d. Existing Conditions.

15-35
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

The traffic signal base maps shall be printed using CSI Standards resulting in a
lighter tone for existing conditions. The plan shall include, but not be limited to,
the following information:
(1) Right-of-way, easements and street names.
(2) Curbs and medians.
(3) Lane lines and channelization.
(4) Sidewalks.
(5) Utilities (underground and overhead):
(a) Electric.
(b) Gas.
(c) Telephone.
(d) Communications & Cable TV.
(e) Traffic and Illumination
(f) Sanitary Sewer.
(g) Storm Sewer.
(h) Water.
(i) Utility manholes, vaults and valves.
(6) Monuments and benchmarks.
(7) Driveways.
(8) Signs and poles.
(9) Angle of intersecting streets.
(10) Building lines.
(11) Other pertinent features (e.g., trees, shrubs, street furniture, etc.).

4. Plans and Drawings.

a. General.
(1) All plans and drawings should be prepared with black ink on Consultant
furnished 22-inch x 34-inch Mylar reproducible sheets, using the Standard
City of Houston, Traffic and Transportation Division Title Block on all traffic
sheets.
(2) Standard Title Sheet, General Notes and Responsibilities Sheet, Traffic Signal
Plan Sheet(s), Pole Schedule and Cable Schematic Sheet, and Detail Sheets,
should be used for all traffic signal projects. An electronic Title Sheet,
General Notes and Responsibilities Sheet and blank Pole Schedule are
available from the City for use on traffic signal projects. Plan sets should not
include copies of the City’s standard traffic signal details.
(3) If necessary, additional sheets for plans and profiles, pavement markings or
signing shall be provided as needed or as directed.
(4) A legend will be provided showing any non-standard symbols.
(5) On projects where the Consultant finds it necessary to deviate from the
standard format presented herein, due to project scope or design requirements,
the City’s Project Manager should be consulted to determine an acceptable

15-36
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

alternate format. Any changes to the format are at the discretion of the City’s
project manager.
(6) Graphic requirements for engineering drawings shall comply with Chapter 3,
Graphic Requirements. New lane striping shall be shown using CSI/NCS pen
format.

b. Plan sets should consist of the elements listed below:


(1) Title Sheet (City Standard).
(2) General Notes and Responsibilities Sheet.
(3) Traffic Signal Plan Sheet(s).
(4) Pole Schedule and Cable Schematic Sheet(s).
(5) Detail Sheet(s) (as required).
(6) Plan and Profile Sheets (as required).
(7) Pavement Marking Sheet(s) (as required).
(8) Signing Plan Sheet(s) (as required)
(9) Standard Details

c. Provide a table for inductive loop applications to show the station and offset for
detection loops and stop lines on the plan sheet. A sample table is shown below.

STOP LINE AND LOOP DETECTOR LOCATIONS


ITEM BY APPROACH STREET 1 OFFSET FROM ITEM BY APPROACH STREET 2 OFFSET FROM
STATION OF CONST CL TO CL STATION OF CONST CL TO CL OF
APPROACH EDGE OF LOOP APPROACH LOOP
EDGE
EASTBOUND: SOUTHBOUND:
STOP LINE: STA. XX+XX STOP LINE: STA. XX+XX

PHASE 2 PULSE LOOP STA. XX+XX CENTERED IN LANE PHASE 4 PULSE LOOP STA. XX+XX CENTERED IN LANE

PHASE 5 PRESENCE
LOOP STA. XX+XX CENTERED IN LANE
WESTBOUND: NORTHBOUND:
STOP LINE: STA. XX+XX STOP LINE: STA. XX+XX

PHASE 6 PULSE LOOP STA. XX+XX CENTERED IN LANE PHASE 8 PULSE LOOP STA. XX+XX CENTERED IN LANE

d. Pole Schedule and Cable Schematic Sheet.


(1) Pole Schedule.

A pole schedule shall be provided showing the pole and its identifier, the pole
type, information on the mast arm(s), signal heads, luminaire, pedestrian
pushbuttons and signs, the pole location and relative City standards. Each pole
will have its own row within the schedule. The pole schedule shall be a table
formatted as shown below.

POLE POLE MAST ARM SIGNALS LUMINAIRE PED PB REMARKS LOCATION STANDARDS
NUMBER TYPE SIGNAL LUMINAIRE MOUNTING FACE TYPE TYPE/SIGN

15-37
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(2) Cable Schematic.

Low and high-voltage cable schematics shall be displayed on the pole schedule
and cable schematic sheet. The cable schematic shall include:
(a) Conduit Run Identifiers.
(b) Conduit Size.
(c) Type of Conductors in each run.
(d) Legend.
(e) Consultant shall conduct interim review of project status and technical issues
with city at appropriate project milestones agreed upon by City and
consultant.

5. Field Books.

a. Typically, field books will be prepared by the City. A designer should not submit
a field book unless specifically requested by the City. All timing data requested
by the City shall be submitted electronically in a format specified by the City.

b. If requested, field books should contain the following:


(1) 2070 Programming/Timing Sheets.
(2) CMU Programming Sheets.
(3) Signal Layout.
(4) Cabinet Drawings.
(5) Field Input Panel Sheet.
(6) Field Output Panel Sheet.

B. Intersection Design Study.

The purpose of this operational analysis is to document the information, assumptions, and
procedures used to develop the preliminary design and to affirm that the design level of
service will be provided through the design year.

1. Conditions to be analyzed.

The Intersection Design Study shall present an analysis of the intersection traffic
operation and level of service for the AM and PM peak hours for each of the
following conditions:

a. Existing traffic and geometric conditions.

b. Projected traffic and proposed geometric conditions in the design year with the
traffic signal(s) in operations.

15-38
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

c. Projected traffic and proposed geometric conditions at project completion,


including projections of any new traffic due to trip diversions and/or known new
trip generation with traffic signals in operation.

d. Projected traffic and proposed geometric conditions in the intermediate year with
traffic signals in operation.

2. Method of Analysis.

The level of service for the signalized conditions shall be determined in accordance
with the procedures defined in the current edition of the Highway Capacity Manual
(HCM). The official FHWA-approved software (Highway Capacity Software (HCS)
or HiCap 2000) will be used, and the printouts from that software will be part of the
study. Other software packages may be acceptable, but their use will require prior
approval by the City. The Highway Capacity Manual is available from the
Transportation Research Board and the software is generally available from McTrans
and other sources. When the Consultant proposes a less conservative design than
determined by HCM method, Consultant will be required to provide supporting
evidence to the satisfaction of the City. If the City requests additional analysis to
evaluate new/alternative technology and such work causes additional work,
Consultant shall obtain written authorization from the City prior to initiating work.

3. Required Level of Service:

The level of service to be provided in the design year shall be level of service D or
better (i.e.; LOS A, B, or C).

4. Application Method.

The Operational method shall be used for all analysis.

5. Procedure.

The Consultant shall determine the geometrics required to provide the design level of
service in the design year. After determining the required geometrics, the Consultant
shall analyze the intersection for the proposed geometrics and projected traffic upon
project completion using the methodology for unsignalized intersections. If these
conditions result in a level of service “B” or better for all movements, additional
analysis may be required, but will be considered extra work.

6. Traffic Signal Warrant Analysis.

a. The engineer shall obtain a previously completed traffic signal warrant analysis or
perform a new traffic signal warrant analysis for the intersection.

15-39
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

b. When conducting a new warrant analysis, the engineer shall focus on that the
subject intersection meets “strong” warrants. The City defines Warrants 1 –
Eight-Hour Vehicular Volume and Warrant 7 – Crash Experience. In the case
where weaker warrants are met, all other measures must be exhausted before a
recommendation for a traffic signal will be approved by the City.

c. The engineer should note that not all warrants are applicable to all intersections.

d. The engineer shall also avoid mid-block locations for new signals. New signals
should be spaced at least ¼ mile away from existing or planned signals.

e. The City requires that a minimum of eight (8) hours (includes am and pm peak
hours) of turning movement counts be collected for a traffic signal warrant
analysis. If a right turn lane is available or is recommended, all right turning
traffic shall be deducted from the hourly approach volumes. If a shared
through/right turn lane exists, one half of all right turning traffic on the approach
shall be deducted. This is based on the presumption that right turning vehicles
typically do not require a traffic signal in order to safely enter another street.

f. When conducting a traffic signal warrant analysis, engineering judgment is


required to determine whether the left turn lane is counted as an additional lane.
As a rule of thumb, the engineer should consider the ratio of left turning traffic to
the other traffic. If the left turning volume exceeds twenty (20) percent of the
total traffic, the left turn lane should be counted as an additional lane. Exclusive
right turn lanes are not to be counted as an additional lane since their volumes are
be deducted from the totals.

7. Left Turn Phasing Analysis.

a. Purpose. These guidelines provide a method to uniformly evaluate and install


appropriate left turn phasing at traffic signals within the City of Houston. These
guidelines attempt to minimize the restrictions placed on motorists’ ability to turn
safely through gaps in opposing traffic when such turns can be performed safely.

b. Procedure. Information should be obtained by means of engineering studies and


compared with these guidelines. Rigid adherence to these guidelines is not a
replacement for good engineering judgment.

c. General Guidelines and Considerations.


(1) Traffic engineering judgment must be used to determine left turn phasing
recommendations. Final engineering recommendations, based on engineering
judgment may supersede any or all guidelines.
(2) The least restrictive form of left turn phasing, that can operate safely, should
be considered for implementation. More restrictive control can be made as
traffic conditions change.

15-40
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(3) Proper “yellow trap” protection phasing is required when protected-permitted


phasing is used in a lead-lag configuration.
(4) Permitted left turn phasing is primarily suited for intersections where
opposing and left turn volumes are low and left turns are able to turn through
gaps in traffic without great difficulty or excessive delay.
(5) Protected-permitted phasing is appropriate when the left turn need is based
predominately on volume and delay and the signal is at a moderately traveled
intersection where frequent gaps for left turns occur.
(6) Protected-only left turn phasing should be used when left turn phasing is
required primarily for safety reasons based on left turn crash experience or site
conditions, or when the opposing number of lanes is three or more.

d. Permitted Left Turn Phasing. Permitted left turn phasing may be installed based
on the following guidelines:
(1) Traffic Volumes. This guideline is based on minimum peak hour left turn
volume and the product of the peak hour left turn and opposing volumes (LT
X OV) and the number of opposing lanes (NL). Permitted phasing may be
appropriate if:
(a) Peak hour left turn volume is less than 2 vehicles per cycle.
(b) Peak hour (LT X OV)/NL is below 50,000.
(2) Site Conditions. This guideline is based on several existing conditions at the
intersection location. Permitted phasing may be appropriate if :
(a) Available sight distance is greater than 350 feet when the opposing traffic
is traveling at 35 mph or less, or greater than 400 feet when the opposing
traffic is traveling at 40 mph or more.
(b) Opposing speed is less than 45 mph.
(c) Double left turns are not in operation.
(d) Median width and the number of opposing lanes do not preclude safe
permitted turn operations.
(3) Vehicle Delay. This guideline is based on peak hour left turn delay.
Permitted phasing may be appropriate if :
(a) The mean peak hour delay per left turning vehicle is less than 50 seconds.
(b) The total peak hour left turn delay is less than 3.0 vehicle hours.
(4) Crash Experience. The installation of a more restrictive form of left turn
control may be required if six (6) or more left turn crashes occurred in the past
twelve (12) months.

e. Protected – Permitted Left Turn Phasing. Protected-permitted left turn phasing


provides the benefits of permitted left turn phasing while adding left turn capacity
and can reduce delay to motorists. Protected-permitted phasing may be
appropriate for the following conditions:
(1) Traffic Volume. Protected-permitted phasing may be appropriate if:
(a) Peak hour left turn volume is greater than 2 vehicles per cycle.
(b) Product of the peak hour (LT X OV) is less than 400,000.
(c) Peak hour (LT X OV)/NL is between 50,000 and 200,000.

15-41
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(2) Site Conditions. See guideline for permitted left turn signal phasing.
(3) Vehicle Delay. Protected-permitted phasing may be appropriate if:
(a) The mean peak hour delay per left turning vehicle exceeds 50 seconds.
(b) The total peak hour left turn delay exceeds 3.0 vehicle hours (per leg).
(4) Crash Experience. See guideline for permitted left turn phasing.

f. Protected-Only Left Turn Phasing. Protected-only left turn phasing is the most
restrictive form of left turn control. Protected-only left turn phasing may be
appropriate under the following conditions.
(a) Traffic Volume. Protected- only phasing may be appropriate if:
(b) Peak hour left turn volume is greater than 2 vehicles per cycle.
(c) Product of peak hour (LT X OV) is greater than 400,000.
(d) Peak hour (LT X OV)\NL is greater than 200,000.
(2) Site Conditions. Protected-only phasing may be appropriate if:
(a) Available sight distance is less than 350 feet when the opposing traffic is
traveling at 35 mph or less, or less than 400 feet when the opposing traffic
is traveling at 40 mph or more.
(b) Opposing speed is greater than, or equal to 45 mph.
(c) Double left turns are in operation.
(d) Median width and number of opposing lanes preclude safe permitted turn
operations.
(e) Opposing lanes are 3 or more.
(3) Vehicle Delay. See guideline for protected-permitted left turn signal phasing.
(4) Crash Experience.
(a) Six (6) or more left turn crashes occurred in the most recent twelve (12)
month period.
(5) Policy Compliance. All new left turn phasing installed within the City of
Houston will be evaluated and installed using these guidelines and
engineering judgment.
(6) Policy Exception. Exceptions shall be allowed, as deemed appropriate, by the
Assistant Director managing the Traffic Operations Branch.

8. Alternative Lane Configurations.

a. The level of service analysis shall be used to determine the required number of
through lanes and auxiliary lanes (left and/or right turn lanes) needed to most
economically provide the necessary level of service.

b. Left turn lanes greatly benefit the operation of an intersection which has enough
traffic to require signals. As a result, all new traffic signal designs shall require
the inclusion of a left turn lane unless otherwise specified by the City. In areas
such as the Central Business District, where speeds are low and right-of-way is
not available or is very expensive, the benefits of left turn lanes may be
outweighed by the cost.

15-42
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

c. Right turn lanes and double left turn lanes should be considered as a means of
achieving the desired level of service where the specific turning volumes are very
high.

9. Alternative Phasing.

a. Permitted Left Turns. Permitted only left turns (no separate signal phase
displayed) shall be used unless more restrictive left turn phasing is required as
described below.

b. Protected/Permitted Left Turn Phasing. Protected/permitted left turn phases are


required when any one of the following criteria is met:
(1) They are needed to achieve the required level of service.
(2) The left-turn demand meets the guidelines stated in the current “Left Turn
Phasing Analysis” section of this document.

c. Protected Left Turn Phases. Protected only left turn phases are required when the
following criterion is met:
The left-turn demand meets the guidelines stated in the current “Left Turn
Phasing Guidelines” section of this document.

d. Split Phasing. Split phasing shall be defined as separating two opposing


directions of traffic such that the compatible through and protected left turn
movement receives the right-of-way simultaneously. Split phasing shall require
the approval of the City prior to submitting the preliminary design plans. This
phasing should only be used if one of the following conditions exists:
(1) The opposing approaches are offset to the extent that simultaneous left turns
in opposing directions would cause a high number of conflicts, resulting in a
high collision potential, and the left turn demand is sufficiently high to require
as much green time as the adjacent through movement. When left turn
volumes are lighter, and physical conflict exists, lead-lag operation should be
used.
(2) Double left turn lanes are used in one or both directions and the turning radii
are not sufficient to allow simultaneous left turns without conflicts between
opposing left turn traffic, and subject to the same volume requirements in Item
(a) above.
(3) The left turn volume is extremely heavy on an approach that does not allow
the construction of a separate left turn lane.
(4) Left turn volumes are extremely heavy on opposing approaches and both are
nearly equal to the adjacent through movement critical lane volume (A check
should be made to determine that the design hour level of service will be
significantly improved and that there will not be substantial decreases in level
of service during other hours of the day).

15-43
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(5) The critical lane volumes are lowest when drivers are permitted to turn left
from more than one lane, and are also permitted to use the right-most left turn
lane as a through lane.
(6) If the intersection is in an interconnected system and the coordination plan
would be improved by splitting the phases.

e. Right Turn Overlaps. Overlaps are encouraged where needed. Right-turn


overlaps should be used only if there is a dedicated right turn lane on the approach
and pedestrians are prohibited from crossing parallel and to the right of the
concurrent through movement from the same approach. If right turn overlaps are
provided, it will be necessary to prohibit u-turns for the opposing left turn
approach. Appropriate signing should be detailed in the plans. An example of
this operation would be when the left turn arrows on the main street approach are
displayed simultaneously with a right turn arrow on one or both side street
approaches. This type of operation should only be used where:
(1) there are 250 or more right turns during a peak hour and;
(2) there are 200 or more corresponding left turns during the same hour and;
(3) the per lane through volume for the same approach is approximately equal to,
or less than, the right turn volume.

C. Geometric Design Elements.

If the construction of geometric changes in the street is required, the work shall be done in
accordance with the City of Houston’s Uniform Development Code, Chapter 10 of the
Infrastructure Design Manual, and in accordance with the following criteria:

1. Design Speed.

The design speed for a street shall be the anticipated 85th percentile speed plus 5
MPH, in accordance with the major thoroughfare and Freeway Plan (MTFP), or as
directed.

2. Design Vehicle.

The design vehicle shall be a WB-50 (AASHTO Green Book) or as directed.

3. Auxiliary Lane Design.

a. Opposing left turn lanes shall be designed for protected/permitted left turn
signalization unless protected only left turn phasing is required by Section
15.11.02.B.7. Sight distance for drivers of left turning vehicles to see beyond
opposing left turning vehicles shall be calculated in accordance with Case III A –
Crossing Maneuver (AASHTO Green Book).

15-44
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

b. The storage length of the left or right turn lanes shall be determined based on the
expected queue length as defined in Chapter 10 of the Infrastructure Design
Manual. The minimum left turn lane storage length shall be 100 feet unless
restricted by other factors. The maximum left-turn lane length should be 400 feet.
If the expected queue storage length exceeds 400 feet or the left turning volume
during the peak hour exceeds 200 vehicles, dual left turn lanes should be
considered.

4. Tapers.

a. A taper, in this context, refers to the transition in pavement width between the
centerline and the edge of pavement, e.g., the lateral transition of a median to
accommodate a left turn bay. Wherever possible, the transition taper shall be a
symmetrical reverse curve. This taper length shall not be subtracted from the total
required storage length (Total Turn lane Length = Storage Length + Transition
Taper length).

b. All approach taper ratios for collectors and thoroughfares shall be based on the
posted speed limit plus 5 mph or 85th percentile speed (whichever is greater) and
shall be calculated using the formulas described in the Texas Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices.

5. Islands.
Generally, raised (curbed) islands for the use of channelizing traffic, as in the case of
a right turn lane, shall not be used. When islands are needed, sizes and dimensions
should meet the recommended AASHTO requirements. Mountable curb and gutter
shall be used on all islands.

6. Medians.

a. The minimum width of a raised median shall be four feet from face of curb to face
of curb. A six-foot width shall be considered where a left turn lane is opposed by
three or more right and through lanes to provide greater pedestrian storage and to
reduce pedestrian clearance timings.

b. Both vehicle and pedestrian characteristics should be considered for design of the
location of the median nose.

c. Bullet nose medians shall be required adjacent to a left turn bay at an intersection
with a street other than a primary arterial. This 3-centered curve shall have radii
of 50’, 3’, and 50’.

d. The median opening must be wide enough to provide for adequate turning
movements by left turning vehicles. In no case shall the median opening be
narrower than 40 ft.

15-45
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

e. In the development of a left or right turn lane; the pavement shall be widened via
a symmetrical reverse curve as described in the Infrastructure Design Manual,
Figure 10.06-07.

7. Pedestrian Landings.

At intersection corners without sidewalks, where traffic signal poles are to be


installed, a pedestrian landing shall be constructed according to the diagram in the
Standard Details.

8. Curb Return Radius.

Where two streets intersect, certain radii are required for the curbs per the
Infrastructure Design Manual.

D. Pavement Markings.

Before traffic signals are located on the base map, the pavement markings (existing or
proposed) should be located to act as a guide in the location of signal heads and detector
loops. Pavement markings shall conform to the Standard Specifications and Detail Sheets as
well as meet the following guidelines:

1. Pavement Marking Materials.

a. Preformed plastic pavement markings, as specified in the Standard Specifications,


shall be used for all lane lines, island markings, cross hatching, arrows and
legends.

b. Preformed plastic pavement markings, as specified in the Standard Specifications,


shall be used for all pedestrian crosswalks and stop bars.

2. Lane Lines.

a. Lane lines shall be aligned with corresponding lane lines on the opposite side of
the intersection.

b. Lane lines shall terminate at the stop or at the curb return (on uncontrolled
approaches).

3. Crosswalks.

a. Crosswalks shall be installed across all approaches except where pedestrians are
prohibited from crossing. They shall provide access to all corners of an
intersection.

15-46
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

b. Crosswalks shall be ten feet wide. See the City of Houston Standard Detail for
crosswalk configuration.

c. Crosswalks should match up with handicapped ramps where possible.

d. No transverse marking shall be placed within 18” of the curb or raised median.

4. Stop Lines.

a. Stop lines shall be placed at all signalized locations.

b. The stop lines shall be 24” wide and extend from a point 18” from the curb to the
solid double yellow line (or a point 18” from the raised median). It shall be
located in accordance with City Standards.

5. Turn Arrows and Legends.

City of Houston only uses Arrows or Onlys in exclusive turn lanes.

E. Traffic Signal Hardware Design.

The traffic signal hardware shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria:

1. Traffic Signal Heads.

a. Number and Location of Heads:


(1) The minimum number of traffic signal heads for all approaches shall be in
conformance with the current edition of the TMUTCD.
(2) Generally, one traffic signal head will be provided for each through lane.
(3) Generally, the traffic signal heads shall be located directly above the lane line.
(4) Typically, a minimum of two left turn traffic signal heads shall be provided.
One left turn traffic signal head will be located directly over the lane line
between the left turn lane and the adjacent through lane. A second left turn
head shall be provided on the far left corner of the intersection. Additional
left turn traffic signal heads may be required for multiple left turn lanes.
(5) Where there is only one approach lane, two signal heads shall be located at
least 8 feet apart, with the center of the separation between the heads located
over the center of the lane.

b. Size and Configuration:


(1) Generally, all traffic signal heads shall be oriented in a horizontal alignment.
(2) All pole mounted traffic signal heads shall be mounted vertically in line with
the pole shaft.
(3) All sections of vehicular traffic signal heads shall have 12” LED indications.

15-47
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(4) Protective/permitted left turn signal heads on span wires and on a steel pole, a
five-section in-line head shall be used.
(5) At split-phase approaches, the left-most head shall be a 4-section head with a
left arrow section.
(6) Protected only left turn traffic signal heads shall be three section heads
consisting of red, yellow and green arrow indications (three arrows).
(7) Traffic signal heads located in the Downtown and Uptown District shall be
black in color. All other traffic signal heads in the City shall be yellow unless
otherwise specified by the City.

c. Type of Signal Head:


(1) All signal head housings shall be constructed of polycarbonate in accordance
with the Standard Specifications.
(2) Optically programmed signal heads shall be used whenever the indications
can be viewed by two or more conflicting movements of traffic at skewed
intersections, or where two sets of indications for the same direction are not to
be viewed simultaneously, such as the second set of indications on the cross
street at an offset intersection.
(3) Bi-modal indication signal sections shall not be used.

d. Type of Mounting:
(1) All mast arm mounted signal heads shall be mounted with fully adjustable
“Astro-brac” brackets, or an approved equal.
(2) All mast arm mounted traffic signal heads will be mounted on a tenon. If a
tenon is not available on the mast arm, a hole should be drilled and a tenon
clamp kit used.
(3) Post top signal heads with backplates shall be mounted with a mounting
meeting the Standard Specifications.
(4) Side-mount signal heads shall be mounted using standard mountings and
shown on the plans as being on a side of the pole away from vehicular traffic.

e. Backplates:
All traffic signal heads on steel poles shall be equipped with louvered backplates
conforming to Standard Specifications.

f. Installation Procedures:
The specifications include the requirement that mast arms shall be drilled for wire
accesses after installation on the pole base to provide concealed wiring and proper
signal head location.

2. Pedestrian Traffic Signal Heads.

a. Type and Number:


(1) Pedestrian traffic signal heads shall be installed wherever crosswalks are
provided, except crossing free right turn lanes.

15-48
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(2) Two pedestrian traffic signal heads shall be installed, one at each end of the
crosswalk being controlled. Do not locate pedestrian signals on median
islands (adjacent to left turn lanes) unless directed to do so by the City.

b. Legend:
(1) Generally, all pedestrian signal heads shall have international symbol
messages consisting of a Portland orange hand and a lunar white walking
man.
(2) At locations where only a portion of the intersection is being rebuilt, older
pedestrian traffic signal indications shall be converted to man/hand style
indication.

c. Size and Configuration:


(1) All pedestrian traffic signal heads shall have 16” LED Countdown indications.
(2) Pedestrian traffic signal heads located in the Downtown and Uptown District
shall be black in color. All other pedestrian traffic signal heads in the City
shall be yellow unless otherwise specified by the City.

d. Location:
Pedestrian traffic signal heads shall be located as nearly in line with the crosswalk
as possible. If the mast arm pole is located such that the pedestrian signal will be
blocked by stopped vehicles or if it is more than 20 feet outside of the crosswalk
lines extended, then an alternative means of mounting shall be designed.
Pedestrian traffic signal heads shall be mounted 7 feet (to the bottom of the head)
above the walking surface on the side of pole away from vehicular traffic.
Pedestrian traffic signals shall be shown on the plans as being mounted on the
side of the pole away from vehicular traffic by use of the symbol.

3. Relocating Traffic Signal Heads.

Signal heads shall be relocated only when they are in good condition, are in
conformance with this section, and no modifications are necessary. The relocation of
any traffic signal heads shall require the prior approval of the City.

4. Mast Arm Assemblies and Poles.

Typically, the City prefers that mast arm poles be used for all new traffic signal
installations. In special cases, the City may allow strain pole installations based on a
written recommendation by the engineer explaining the need for a span wire design.

a. Location (Including Setback):


(1) Poles shall be located such the center of the pole is a minimum of four (4) feet
from the face of curb.

15-49
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(2) Mast arm traffic signal poles should not be located in the median unless no
other option exists. Any mast arm poles located in the median shall require
approval by the City prior to the preliminary plan submittal.
(3) On streets without curbs, or with speeds greater than 35 MPH, poles shall be
located a minimum of 10 feet behind the edge of pavement or 3 feet behind
the edge of the paved shoulder, whichever is greater, and should be located 15
feet from a line extended from the edge of the through traffic lanes.
(4) Poles should be located in line with the opposing directions stop line
(approximately four feet behind the crosswalk line).
(5) Poles should be located as close to the sidewalk or pedestrian landing as
possible for pedestrian pushbutton access, yet still be within the guidelines for
distance from the curb or traveled way.
(6) No poles shall be located in wheelchair ramps or such that they are an
obstruction to pedestrians or wheelchairs.
(7) On the plans, the Consultant shall tie down the location of all poles referenced
to the street centerline by station to the nearest foot and offset to the nearest
half foot.

b. Mast Arm Lengths:


(1) Mast arms longer than 46 feet in length may require an evaluation of the pole
and foundation to be used as determined by the City.
(2) Mast arm lengths should allow for probable future modifications to the signal.
If a left turn lane exists, the arm should extend to the lane line between the left
turn lane and the adjacent through lane. Where permitted or
permitted/protected left turn movements are allowed, an R10-12 “LEFT
TURN YIELD ON GREEN BALL” sign shall be installed next to the traffic
signal head over the lane line between the left turn lane and adjacent through
lane and below the far left traffic signal head.

c. Clearances from Utilities:

Poles shall be located such that all portions of the poles and attached equipment
have clearances from overhead utilities in accordance with the requirements of the
local utility and the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

d. Material and Style:


(1) All poles shall conform to the Standard Specifications and Details. Special
poles and features shall be coordinated and approved by the City.
(2) The centerline of the mast arm shall be at 90 degrees to the centerline of the
approach it is serving unless otherwise required.

e. Delivery Time:

15-50
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Typical delivery time for mast arm poles is 8 – 12 weeks from the approval of
submittals. The number of days specified in the contract should account for the
long delivery time.

f. Luminaries and Luminary Mast Arms:

Are not currently used in the City. If future standard specifications for traffic
signal poles include the ability to provide luminaries, the City will inform the
designer when to include luminaries in the design.

5. Pedestrian Pushbuttons.
Pedestrian pushbuttons shall be required at all new or modified traffic signal locations
within the City of Houston outside of the Downtown. In the Downtown, controllers
will be set with a recall for all pedestrian movements to accommodate the anticipated
heavy pedestrian movements. The omission of pedestrian pushbuttons at any other
locations shall require the approval of the City.

a. All pedestrian pushbuttons shall be Polara Navigator or approved equal


Accessible Pedestrian Systems (APS).

b. No more than one pedestrian pushbutton shall be located on a single traffic signal
pole.

c. Pedestrian pushbuttons should be located no more than ten (10) feet from the face
of curb or more than five (5) feet from the crosswalk extension.

d. Pedestrian pushbuttons shall be separated by a minimum distance of ten (10) feet.

e. All pedestrian pushbutton stations shall be accompanied by a pedestrian


pushbutton sign (R10-3e) with instructions.

F. Controller and Cabinet Design.

1. Controllers.

All new controllers shall be the Type 2070 Advanced Traffic Controllers (ATC)
unless otherwise directed by the City.

2. Phasing.

15-51
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

a. The sequence of operations shall be shown by the phasing sequence diagram for
each intersection on the plan sheet. Permitted movements shall not be indicated
unless part of a protected/permitted sequence. All pedestrian movements shall be
shown.

b. Phases shall be designated on the traffic signal plan sheet in accordance with the
standard NEMA phase designations. In addition, the phases shall be assigned as
follows (unless limited by the controller cabinet). As shown, phases 3 and 8 are to
be oriented north.

3. Controller Cabinet Type..

a. New Type 2070 ATC controllers shall be housed in one of a selection of four
cabinets from the Standard Specifications:
(1) Type 340 ITS Cabinet (Housing Package Type 3) – This is the standard
cabinet for installation at City of Houston Intersections. This cabinet shall be
used at locations where 8-phase operation would be employed in the new or
future system, where a 7-wire interconnect master is desired (with auxiliary
load rack), or for a master/local on a closed loop system. This cabinet will fit
on a standard NEMA “P” cabinet foundation.
(2) Type 342 ITS Cabinet (Housing Package Type 1) – The Type 342 ITS cabinet
is a smaller cabinet that uses the Type 332 cabinet profile and will fit a Type
332 cabinet foundation. This cabinet should only be used on intersection
retrofit projects where the existing foundations and conduit system are to
remain. It should not be specified without prior approval by the City.
(3) Type 346 ITS Cabinet (Housing Package Type 2) – The Type 346 ITS cabinet
generally has the same capabilities as the Type 332 cabinet in a smaller unit.
This cabinet does not allow room for a 7-wire or modem unit shall be used
where there is not adequate room or right-of-way for a Type 332 foundation,
but expandable 8-phase capacity is desired. These cabinets are typically only
to be used in the Downtown area and will require prior approval by the City.

15-52
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

b. Selection of which cabinet to use shall be based on the cabinet use descriptions
above, and approved by the City.

4. Controller Cabinet Location.

a. The controller cabinet should be located to minimize the probability of being hit
by a vehicle. Locations particularly susceptible to accident damage are:
(1) The far corner (apex) for a dual left turn or right turn movement where the
crossing street doesn’t have a raised median.
(2) The far corner (apex) for a heavy left turn movement.
(3) The far right corner of a high-speed approach where a right angle collision can
knock a car into the controller.
(4) Generally, the controller should be located upstream on the heaviest approach
and/or back from the corner on the minor approach if there is a significant
difference in approach volumes or speeds. Consideration should be given to
locating the controller where it is protected by an existing non-breakaway pole
or a mast arm pole.

b. Where possible, the controller should be located on the same corner as the power
supply. Special care should be taken that the load center is not separated from the
controller by a wide, high speed or high volume street.

c. Areas subject to flooding shall be avoided.

d. Cabinets shall be positioned such that when the door opens, the maintenance
personnel will have a clear view of the intersection and the inside of the cabinet.
If the cabinet is too high to see over, the cabinet shall be positioned so that the
technician has a clear view of the intersection without looking around the open
door.

G. Detector Design.

1. General.

The City’s practice is to install video detection on all new signalized intersections.
When using video detection systems, at least one camera shall be installed for each
intersection approach.

2. Emergency Vehicle Pre-Emption Equipment.

All new City traffic signal installations shall require the installation of 3M Opticom
emergency pre-emption equipment. Sensors shall be installed for all intersection
approaches. The City of Houston uses a coded system which requires proprietary

15-53
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

software. For this reason only 3m Opticom equipment can be used for City
installations.

3. Inductive Loop Detectors.


These guidelines are included for special cases where loop detectors are necessary as
authorized by the City.

a. Types of loop installations shall be broken into two categories depending on the
proposed pavement work:
(1)Pre-formed Loops – Use pre-formed loops any place where the entire loop falls
in an area of new, overlaid, milled and replaced, or seal-coated pavement.
The excavation and patching required are easily covered up by the pavement
work, and the pre-formed loops can last virtually forever, if properly installed.
(2)Saw cut Loops – Use saw cut loops if the loop or any part of the loop would
end up in an existing pavement that will not be modified by any of the
methods noted above. This is a less desirable method of loop installation, but
can give acceptable loop life if properly installed.

b. The detector lead-in cable is a shielded twisted pair cable extending from the loop
pull box to the controller cabinet. The detector lead-in cable shall be a continuous
run without splices.

c. Except where noted otherwise, dimensions for detector loop setbacks shall be
referenced from stop line. The detector reference line should be curved if needed
to follow the alignment of the street.

d. Each loop shall be connected to its own detector lead-in cable. Multiple detector
lead-in cables may run in the same conduit.

4. Identification Scheme.

Detector loops shall be identified on the plan sheets by their phase, lane and purpose.
Each lane will be numbered from left to right starting with the lane closest to the
centerline. Advance detection loops shall be identified as pulse loops. Detection
loops in through lanes at the stop line will be designated as call loops. Finally,
detector loops in the turn lanes or on low speed minor approaches shall be presence
loops. For example, when speaking about the advance loop for eastbound in the lane
closest to the median would be referred to as the Phase 2 pulse loop 1.

5. Advance Loops on Higher Speed Approaches (Posted Speed > 30 MPH).

a. Location.
(1) For higher speed approaches, it may be necessary to design and install
advance loop detectors even when video detection systems are installed.

15-54
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(2) For higher speed approaches, advance loop detectors for the through lanes of
traffic shall be located five (5) seconds from the stop line using the following
table:

Posted Design Advance


Speed Limit Speed Detector Passage
(mph) (mph) Distance (ft)* Time (sec)
35** 40 300 3.0
40 45 337 3.0
45 50 374 3.0
50 55 410 3.0
55 60 447 3.0

*- As measured from the leading detector edge to the stop line.

** - Presence detection is to be used for side street approaches if the


higher through phase critical lane volume for the side street is less than
one-half the critical lane volume of the higher volume main street
through phase.

(3) In addition to the advance detectors, call loops in each lane shall be placed
near the crosswalk. The front edge of a 6’ x 6’ detection loop (either pre-
formed or saw cut) shall be located four (4) feet back from the stop line. At
locations involving skewed intersections, or other extenuating circumstances,
the loop positions and sizes may need to be adjusted to account for vehicles
stopping in front of or in the crosswalk. In all cases, detection must be
provided 10 feet upstream from the back of the crosswalk. The intent of the
loop placement is to prevent the smallest passenger cars, motorcycles and
bicycles from being caught in an undetected area. If adjusted, the size and
spacing of the loops shall remain constant.

b. Detector Lead-in Cable.


(1) The upstream pulse loops for the dilemma zone protection shall be on separate
detector amplifier channels.
(2) If there is more than one through lane, adjacent upstream loops shall be placed
on separate channels without connection to any other loop.
(3) The two stop line loops shall be spliced in series at the cabinet and connected
to the same detector amplifier. This amplifier shall be the “call” input
amplifier, with the loops of each lane split between the two channels.
(4) The upstream loop detector lead-in cables shall be routed to the nearest
junction box along a patch perpendicular to the direction of travel. Homeruns
for adjacent loops, less than 16 feet apart, should be routed to the nearest
junction box in the same cut to the extent possible to minimize excavation of
the pavement. When loops are adjacent to medians, the homerun can be
routed directly to the median and then to the nearest junction box.

15-55
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(5) The stop line loop lead-in cable will generally be routed to the same junction
box. All the detector lead-in cables for conduit-encased loops should be
routed parallel and adjacent to each other along a path perpendicular to the
direction of travel. A path parallel to the direction of travel may be needed
from the individual loop to the common perpendicular routing.

6. Low Speed Approaches.

a. Location.
(1) Large area presence detection shall be used on approaches with less than 35
MPH posted or anticipated 85th percentile speed. It shall also be used on side
street approaches, with a posted or anticipated 85th percentile speed of 35
MPH, if the higher through phase critical lane volume is less than one-half the
critical lane volume of the highest volume main street through phase.
(a) Pre-formed Loops. Large area presence detection shall consist of two (2)
6’ x 6’ detector loops placed in each lane beginning at the stop line. The
second shall be placed an additional 9 feet upstream of the back of the first
detector. Saw cut Loops. Large area presence detection shall generally
consist of a single 6’ x 10’ detector loop in a single lane beginning at the
stop line.
(2) At locations involving skewed intersections, or other extenuating
circumstances, the loop positions, number or sizes may need to be adjusted to
account for vehicles stopping in front of or in the crosswalk. Care should be
taken to not leave too much undetected space immediately upstream of the
crosswalk. The intent of the loop placement is to prevent the smallest
passenger cars, motorcycles and bicycles from being caught in an undetected
area. If adjusted, the distances between the pre-formed detector loops shall
remain constant.

b. Detector Lead-in Cable.


(1) In the case of the pre-formed detector loops, the loops in a lane may be
combined on one channel. In all cases, each loop shall be spliced to its own
detector lead-in cable running back to the cabinet.
(2) Detector lead-in cables for the loops closest to the intersection should be
routed to the same junction box. Detector lead-in cables for adjacent loops
should be routed to the nearest junction box in the same cut to the extent
possible to minimize excavation of the pavement. A path parallel to the
direction of travel may be needed from the individual loop to the common
perpendicular routing.

7. Left Turn Lane Detection.

a. Location.
(1) Large area presence detection shall be used for left turn lane detections.

15-56
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Pre-formed Loops. Large area presence detection shall consist of four (4) 6’ x
6’ detector loops placed in each lane beginning in front of the crosswalk line
closest to intersection. The additional pre-formed loops shall be placed nine
(9) foot intervals upstream starting at the back of the each detector. Saw cut
Loops. Large area presence detection shall generally consist of a single 6’ x
50’ detector loop in a single lane beginning with twenty (20) feet extending
beyond the stop line into the intersection. If necessary due to beaks in
pavement panels, a series of loops may be cut adding up to a total length of
fifty (50) feet.
(2) At locations involving skewed intersections, or other extenuating
circumstances, the loop positions, number or sizes may need to be adjusted to
account for vehicles stopping in front of or in the crosswalk. Care should be
taken to not leave too much undetected space immediately upstream of the
crosswalk. The intent of the loop placement is to prevent the smallest
passenger cars, motorcycles and bicycles from being caught in an undetected
area. If adjusted, the distances between the pre-formed detector loops shall
remain constant.

b. Detector Lead-in Cable.


(1) Where medians are constructed adjacent to left turn lanes, the detector lead-in
cable(s) should be routed to a junction box in the median.
(2) In the case of the pre-formed loops, the upstream loop shall be connected to
its own channel on an amplifier. The other loops may be combined on one
channel. For multiple saw cut loops, the rear loop and front loops shall be on
separate channels. In all cases, each loop shall be spliced to its own lead-in
cable running back to the cabinet.
(3) If there are two or more left turn lanes, all the loops in one lane shall be
connected in a like manner as described in paragraph b. above.

8. Right Turn Lane Detection.

a. Location.
If detection for a right turn lane is provided, it shall be installed in the same
manner as a presence loop for a through lane on a low speed approach.

b. Detector Lead-in Cable.


The right turn presence detection loop shall be connected into its own detector
lead-in cable, and separate channel on an extension amplifier for the through
phase.

9. Construction of Inductive Loops.

See the Standard Specifications and Details for construction requirements.

10. Other Detection Devices.

15-57
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

The engineer may recommend other detection technologies and submit a written
recommendation outlining the benefits of the technology. However, the City reserves
the final authority to approve or disapprove the use of these technologies.

Note: Video detection equipment is to be used in the design of intersections where


existing pavement is to remain or as directed by the City. Lane detector loops are to
be used where new pavement is to be provided or in special cases as determined by
the designer.

H. Underground Systems.

1. Conduit.

a. Type of Conduit.
All conduits shall be as specified in the Standard Specifications. The designer
must pay careful attention to where the Standard Specifications call for certain
types of conduits for certain uses as well as when boring and encasing is to be
used so the estimates can accurately reflect the field quantities.

b. Installation.
(1) Conduit shall be installed according to the Standard Specifications.
Requirements for depth below finish grade shall be strictly adhered to.
(2) The Consultant, in conjunction with the City, shall determine if conduit
crossing certain paved streets should be shown as open cut or bored due to
extensive utility problems. The specifications should require an alternate bid
option of both methods to allow for unforeseen factors.
(3) In general, conduit runs crossing paved alleys, drives, and streets shall be
bored.

c. Conduit Sizing.
(1) Conduits shall be sized according to minimum allowed sizes and allowed
conduit fill.
(2) Conduit shall be in ½” incremental sizes, with the exception of the rigid
galvanized conduits on span-wire installations as shown in the Standard
Details.
(3) Conduit fill shall not exceed 40% on any one conduit or 26% average for all
conduits on any one run.
(4) When crossing the street with interconnects cable, the spare conduit required
for a street crossing may be used if adequate capacity is available.
(5) One (1) inch conduit shall only be used to protect the Street Loop Wire from
the loop to the adjacent pull box.

Table 1
Dimensions and Maximum Percentage of Filled Area of Conduit

15-58
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Cross
Internal Sectional
Trade Diameter Area (Sq 26% Fill 40% Fill
Size (In) In) (Sq In) (Sq In)
1" 1.029 0.83 0.22 0.33
2" 2.047 3.29 0.86 1.32
2-1/2" 2.445 4.70 1.22 1.88
3" 3.042 7.27 1.89 2.91
4" 3.998 12.55 3.26 5.02
Source: National Electrical Code; Chapter 9, Table 4.

d. Length of Conduit Run.


Conduit runs should be limited to 190 feet between pull boxes or structures where
the cable is reasonably accessible for pulling. If the conduit run is very straight,
with no more than 180 degrees of bend, and contains only a single cable, the run
may be extended to about 350 feet.

e. Spare Conduits.
Spare conduits shall be installed as shown in the Standard Details.

f. Location of Conduit Runs.


(1) If new sidewalk is part of the construction, conduit runs may be located under
the new sidewalk with the junction boxes being constructed flush with the
sidewalk.
(2) If the sidewalk is existing, and a planting strip exists between the curb and the
sidewalk, the conduit and junction boxes should be located either in the
planting strip or on the other side of the sidewalk (right-of-way permitting),
whichever has fewer utility conflicts.
(3) If there is no curb and gutter, the conduit and junction boxes should be located
as far as possible back near the right-of-way, but not in drainage areas.
(4) Conduit runs shall be located away from drainage collection points whenever
possible.

2. Pull Boxes.

a. Size.
Three sizes are available for use from the Standard Specifications and Details.
The designer shall select the applicable box based on number and size of conduits
to be contained in the box. If the designer is concerned that the standard pull box
will be too small, they should select the next larger size pull box. The three sizes
of standard pull boxes used by the City and their applications are:

Type A – To be used for detector loop pull boxes and hardwire interconnect boxes.
Type B – This is the standard traffic signal pull box, but may also be used as a
detector loop pull box where multiple pre-formed loops enter a single pull
box.

15-59
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

Type C – This is the standard pull box to be used for most communications
applications. It can also be used for traffic signals where a large pull box
is required due to multiple large conduits entering the pull box. The most
frequent use of this pull box in traffic signal construction is for the pull
box adjacent to the controller cabinet.

b. Location.
(1) A pull box is generally required adjacent to each loop, set behind the curb or
located on the shoulder to minimize being run over by vehicles.
(2) For low speed approach and turn lane detectors, a junction box should be
located to minimize the length of the detector lead-in cable.
(3) Each quadrant of the intersection shall have a pull box that is within 30 feet of
the traffic signal pole. This pull box should service the traffic signal pole,
detector lead-in conduit, and the conduit crossing the street. If the intersection
is actuated, this pull box can usually be the same box servicing the detectors at
the crosswalk, and possibly the left turn detectors if no median island exists.
It should be located to allow the most direct path for the detector lead-in
cables as well as the conduit crossing the street.
(4) Pull boxes located on corners should be positioned so that turning vehicles do
not track across the pull box.
(5) At span-wire signal installations, item c. holds true for the pull box location
with the exception that you do not have a street-crossing conduit running to
this pull box in most cases.
(6) On the quadrant where the controller cabinet is located, there should generally
be only the one pull box which services the conduit crossing the street, some
detector loops, traffic signal pole, and the controller cabinet. An additional
pull box is required in the Type 332 foundation, per the Standard Detail, and
is also required in many cases where the controller cabinet is post-mounted.
(7) For interconnect runs between intersections, pull boxes shall be provided at
appropriate intervals.

3. Traffic Signal Communications.

a. The City requires that all new traffic signals be interconnected to the existing City
of Houston traffic signal system. The standard means of communications is via
fiber optic cable installed below grade.

b. For below grade fiber optic communications installations, a four (4) inch conduit
with four (4) one inch inner ducts will be used to house the fiber optic cable.
Type C pull boxes are required at maximum spacing of five hundred (500) feet
along the length of the communications conduit.

c. Other communications technologies such as wireless systems may be acceptable


to the City on a case by case basis.

15-60
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

I. Electrical Cable.

1. Detector Lead-In Cable.

a. Detector lead-in cable shall be 14 AWG IMSA 50-2-1984 shielded cable meeting
the requirements of the Standard Specifications.

b. All detector lead-ins cables shall be continuous runs from the splice with the loop
to the controller cabinet terminal strip.

c. Each loop shall be individually brought back to the cabinet on a separate shielded
cable.

2. Street Loop Wire.

Street Loop Wire shall be 14 AWG IMSA 51-5-1985 cable.

3. Power Cable.

a. Power shall be 120 volt, single-cycle, 60 Hz AC.

b. All services shall comply with Electric Company requirements and consist of five
(5) #6 AWG XHHW stranded wires and an 8 AWG Solid Bare Ground. The five
#6 AWG XHHW wires shall consist of two (2) white, one (1) black, one (1) red
and one (1) green wires. A black #6 AWG XHHW stranded wire will be used for
the “hot” signal leg and a white #6 AWG XHHW stranded wire will be used for
the “common” signal leg. The green, red and spare white #6 AWG XHHW
stranded wires shall be reserved as spares or for future luminaire usage.
4. Signal Cable.

a. Traffic Signal Heads.

(1) All traffic signal heads shall be serviced with a 7 conductor, 14 AWG IMSA
19-1-1984 cable meeting the requirements of the Standard Specifications.
(2) IMSA cables are to run un-spliced from the controller cabinet to the terminal
strip in the pole or to the signal heads where termination in the pole is
unavailable.
(3) Each approach will require that at least two heads be on separate IMSA
cables. For additional heads, cables may be run from the first through head
with a second cable from the first head to the additional heads.
(4) Each protected/permissive and protected only left turn signal heads shall be
serviced by its own cable with no splices to other heads.

b. Pedestrian Signal Heads and Pushbuttons.

15-61
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

(1) Each pedestrian signal head shall be serviced by its own five (5) conductors,
14 AWG IMSA 19-1-1984 cables with no splices to other heads.
(2) Each pedestrian pushbutton shall be serviced by a three (3) conductor, 14
AWG IMSA 19-1-1984 cables.

c. Installation, Continuity of Cables, and Splices.


All cable shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specifications for
installation, continuity, and splices.

5. Spare Cables.

Where future pedestrian movements or left turn signal heads are anticipated, spare
electric cables shall be routed from the controller cabinet to the pole on which they
would be installed. In all cases, sufficient spare cable should be provided to connect
to the future location of the equipment.

6. Voltage Drop Calculations.

The designer shall take into account voltage drop calculations where applicable due to
loss over long distances and consider special exceptions to the wire sizes normally
used to accommodate losses.

J. Electrical Services.

1. Type.

All service pedestals and poles shall be as shown in the Standard Specifications and
Details and in compliance with the electric company standards.

2. Procedures for Hook-Up to Utility Company.

a. The utility company shall be contacted for the location of the power source and to
verify their procedures for hook-up of power during the design process.

b. Appropriate notes shall be placed on the plan sheet detailing the Contractor’s
responsibilities for hook-up, including sufficient advance notice to allow hook-up
when the signal system is ready for testing.

c. The service center shall be a ground-mounted service pedestal when there is to be


a steel pole installation. On wood pole span-wire type installations, a wood pole-
mounted service assembly is appropriate. Under no circumstances will the
electric company or the City allow a meter assembly to be attached to an electric
company pole. The assembly has to be located either on a corner signal support
pole or a separately installed service pole, put in by the contractor.

15-62
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

K. Signs.

1. General.

All traffic sign codes in this section are from the current additions of the Standard
Highway Sign Design for Texas and the TMUTCD.

2. Overhead Mounted Street Name Signs.

a. A street name sign (D3, Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices) for
each approach shall be installed on the mast arm between the pole and the first
signal head as shown on the Standard Detail.

b. If the two legs of the cross street have different names, two signs with arrows
shall be installed in lieu of a single street name sign. The sign on the left shall
have an arrow pointing left followed by the street name. To the right of this sign
is a sign with the name of the street to the right followed by an arrow pointing
right.

c. Street name signs shall include block numbers per the Standard Details.

3. Overhead Lane Use Control Signs.

a. Left Turn Lane Without Left Turn Signal:


(1) Install a R10-12 ”LEFT TURN YIELD ON <SYMBOL GREEN BALL>”
lane use control sign next to the signal head at the mast arm tip. A second
sign shall be installed directly below the pole mounted traffic signal head on
the far left corner of the intersection.

b. Left Turn Lane With Protected/Permitted Left Turn Signal:


(1) Install an R10-12 (LEFT TURN YIELD ON <SYMBOL FOR GREEN
BALL>) sign adjacent to the signal head at the mast arm tip. A second sign
shall be installed directly below the pole mounted traffic signal head on the far
left corner of the intersection.
(2) If an existing arm is being used, the sign should be mounted adjacent to the
traffic signal head closest to the mast arm tip.
c. No Left Turn Lane With Protected/Permitted Turn Signal:

(1) Install an R10-12 sign at the end of the mast arm.

d. Left Turn Lane With Protected Only Left Turn Signal:

(1) Install an R10-10 sign at the end of the mast arm.

4. Median and Island Approaches.

15-63
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

a. Median approaches should have an R4-7 Keep Right sign (symbol only) mounted
at the nose of the median.

b. Island approaches, with same directional traffic on both sides shall have a W12-1
Double Arrow sign mounted at the nose of the island.

5. Pedestrian Pushbutton Signs.

Pedestrian Pushbutton signs shall be as shown in the Standard Details.

a. An R10-3e shall be used at most locations.

b. An R10-3b may be used at installations where standard pedestrian indications


without the countdown feature are used.

6. No Pedestrian Crossing Signs.

An R9-3A sign with plaque shall be installed on the mast arm pole at each side of an
approach where no pedestrian signals or crosswalks are used.

7. Diamond Grade Sheeting On Overhead Signs.


All traffic control signs, which are mounted overhead, shall have diamond grade
reflective sheeting. This applies to street name signs, one-way signs, turn restriction
signs, etc.

8. Other Traffic Signs.

Other traffic control signs, e.g., one-way, left lane must turn left, no right turn on red,
no parking, etc., shall be installed as needed. These signs shall meet the requirements
of the TMUTCD.

15.12 RESERVED FOR TRAFFIC CONTROL

15.13 RESERVED FOR MINIMUM VERTICAL CLEARANCES

15.14 RESERVED FOR ON-STREET PARKING

15.15 RESERVED FOR NEIGHBORHOOD TRAFFIC PROJECTS

15.16 RESERVED FOR STREET LIGHTING

15-64
07-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Traffic and Signal Design Requirements

15.17 RESERVED FOR STREET CLOSURES

15.18 RESERVED FOR INTERSECTION TURNING TEMPLATES / DESIGN VEHICLES

15.19 RESERVED FOR TRAFFIC CALMING

15-65
07-01-2009
City of Houston

Design Manual

Chapter 16

MISCELLANEOUS
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

Chapter 16

MISCELLANEOUS

16.01 CHAPTER INCLUDES

A. Criteria for miscellaneous facilities within the public right of way including:

1. Tree protection

2. Residential subdivision markers

3. Sky bridges.

16.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to list of references in Chapter 1, General Requirements

B. City of Houston Code of Ordinances

C. American Association of Nurserymen, 1986 edition.

16.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Drip line – Imaginary circle drawn around a tree, extending to the tree’s branching limit.

B. Entrance marker - Ornamental gate(s), column(s), or other ornamental works of wood, iron,
masonry, earth or other materials denoting the entrance to a platted and recorded single family
residential subdivision.

C. Esplanade – Unpaved area between two paved roadway sections.

D. Parkway – Area lying between the street curb or edge of roadway paving and the adjacent
property line.

E. Protected Tree – Corridor tree, designated tree, green corridor tree or parkway tree as defined
by Chapter 33 of the City of Houston Code of Ordinances.

F. Street Right-of-Way – Entire width between the boundary lines of every way which is held
by the city, county, state or otherwise by the public in fee or dedication when any part thereof
is open to the use of the public for purposes of vehicular travel.

G. Tree-any evergreen or deciduous tree which at the time of planting has a caliper equal to or
greater than 1 1/2 inches as measured six inches above the root collar, which is not less than

16-1
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

six feet in height as measured from the root collar, and which meets the Standard for Nursery
Stock Specifications.

16.04 TREE PROTECTION

A. Tree Protection Requirements


Tree protection requirement is designed to protect trees in a time of any construction activity,
including, without limitation, construction or repair of buildings or other structures,
installation or repair of utilities, or installation or repair of streets or sidewalks within the drip
line circle area of any protected tree that is not to be removed, without complying with the
applicable provisions.

1. Trees to be preserved must be clearly tagged in the field with ribbon.

2. Protection barrier shall be composed of wood, wire, snow fence and braces of similar
non injurious material.

3. Tree wells shall be made of a durable material and set a minimum of four feet from
any tree they are designed to protect.

4. Retaining walls of a durable material, i.e., stone, or treated lumber, are to be


constructed around each tree immediately after the grade is lowered. A retaining wall
must be at least four feet from the tree it is designed to preserve.

5. Any under story clearing within six feet of existing tree trunks should be done by
hand.

6. No building materials are to be stacked or stockpiled within the drip line or within six
feet of any tree to be preserved, whichever is greater.

7. Topsoil shall not be stockpiled within the drip line or within six feet of any tree to be
preserved, whichever is greater.

8. Selective thinning of dead or dying vegetation, tree stumps and other undesired
growth is required in buffer areas. Supplemental vegetation shall comply with the
landscape buffer requirements.

9. Tree boarding should be used if work is required with in construction fencing.

10. Where possible, utility lines shall be tunneled beneath tree roots in order to protect
feeder roots, rather than trenched or open cut.

B. Tree Root Barriers

1. Tree root barriers will be used for planting of new trees, to prevent the uncontrollable

16-2
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

spread of tree roots, following root pruning, to protect land and hardscapes from root
damage.

2. It can be designed for surround or linear application depends on the hardscape to be


protected, distance from surrounding trees, the aggressiveness of the tree, rooting
depth of the tree(s).

3. Holes for the tree should be excavated two feet greater in width than the diameter of
the soil ball.

4. The size of root barriers should be three times the diameter of the root ball.

16.05 RESIDENTIAL SUBDIVISION MARKERS

A. General Considerations/Restrictions

1. Subdivision markers may display the name of the subdivision or neighborhood but shall
not contain any commercial advertising, announcement, or other signage.

2. An electronic sign or marker is not allowed.

3. Subdivision markers may not be located on, extend on to, nor:

a. Intrude upon any portion of a roadway.

b. Intrude upon any portion of a sidewalk or pedestrian pathway in the public right
of way.

c. Create any hazardous condition or obstruction for vehicular or pedestrian travel


upon a public street.

d. Be located within five (5) feet of underground storm, sanitary sewer, water lines
and all appurtenances.

e. Be located within 25 feet of a fire hydrant,

f. Restrict or block driver’s visibility or sight line of traffic, pedestrians, bikeway


travelers, or other public user within the right of way,
16-3
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

g. Be located within the visibility triangle.

B. Locations

1. Subdivision markers may be located at the main entrance to a subdivision and at


secondary entrances.

2. The subdivision marker must be within the boundaries of the subdivision or single family
residential development they identify.

3. Locations where multiple subdivisions interface will be reviewed on a first come, first
serve basis for purposes of establishing allowable subdivision marker locations.

4. The City Engineer’s approval will be required for installation of more than two markers
to identify a single subdivision.

5. The following are minimum allowable entrance marker location guidelines:

a. 50 feet from the median nose for mid-block median openings,

b. 75 feet from the median nose for intersection openings,

c. 100 feet from the median nose of median for left turn lanes,

d. Seven (7) feet from the inside median curb (this dimension may be reduced if
community has entered into maintenance or Adopt-an-Esplanade agreement with
Houston Parks and Recreation Department and does not create a hazardous
condition),

e. Within right-of-way adjacent to property line.

C. Size

1. Maximum height above the ground surface shall not be greater than six (6) feet.

16-4
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

2. Height shall be limited to not obstruct sight lines of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

3. Maximum horizontal width shall not exceed eight (8) feet.

4. Maximum display area shall not exceed 36 square feet.

5. Width shall be limited to not obstruct sight lines of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

6. Variances to the size requirements for a proposed subdivision marker must be granted by
the City Engineer.

D. Materials

1. Materials for base structure shall be permanent, durable, and weather resistant.

2. Marker shall provide pleasing aesthetic elements, clarity, and professional design
appearance.

3. Marker letters and/or other elements should be of non-corrosive and non-staining


materials, and coated properly to prevent staining and discoloration.

4. Material selections should be capable of clean-up from graffiti mark ups.

E. Utilities

1. Marker shall be of size and location to not impede or restrict the City’s ability to
maintain, repair, or replace the existing utility line(s).

2. Existing utilities shall be field located prior to the construction of the entrance marker. It
is recommended that existing utilities shall be field located prior to preparation of the
measured drawings for the entrance marker and its location.

F. Plan Reviews/Permits

1. Drawings shall be submitted to the office of City Engineer for review and approval.
16-5
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

2. Drawings shall show existing surface and buried facilities within the right of way or
easements in plan view.

3. If entrance marker design includes landscaping, the growth characteristics of the plants
shall be submitted with the drawings.

4. Subdivision markers are considered encroachments in the public right-of-way and shall
meet the encroachment requirements set out for subdivision markers in Chapter 41 of the
City of Houston Code of Ordinances.

5. A construction permit will be required prior to construction of a subdivision marker


within the public right of way or public easement. The construction permit will be
obtained by the applicant from 3300 Main, Traffic/Paving Permits Section, upon
submittal of approved plans and appropriate encroachment permit.

16.06 SKYBRIDGES

A. General Requirements

1. A skybridge, as defined in this Chapter, permits pedestrian and other access between
two adjacent structures (not necessarily under the same property ownership) via an
elevated structure or bridge within the public right of way.

2. Skybridges may be open air or conditioned space depending upon the specific
location and application.

3. Skybridges shall not interfere with the operation of the public right of way across
which it traverses and is subject to following height restrictions:

a. The bottom of the lowest portion of the skybridge over the public right of way
must be a minimum of 18.5 feet above the roadway surface.

b. Clearances less than 18.5 feet require review a variance and approval of the City
Engineer.

16-6
7-01-2009
CITY OF HOUSTON DESIGN MANUAL
Department of Public Works & Engineering Miscellaneous

4. Skybridges proposed to traverse an intersection of two public street rights of way


requires approval of the City Engineer.

5. Skybridges are considered encroachments in the public right-of-way and shall meet the
encroachment requirements set out in Chapter 41 of the City of Houston Code of
Ordinances including all administrative, permitting and fees.

END OF SECTION

16-7
7-01-2009

You might also like